YFP 151: How Personal Finance Perceptions Affect Student Pharmacists’ Career Choices


How Personal Finance Perceptions Affect Student Pharmacists’ Career Choices

Dr. Nick Hagemeier joins Tim Ulbrich to talk about an article he and his colleagues published in the American Journal of Pharmaceutical Education titled Student Pharmacists’ Personal Finance Perceptions, Projected Indebtedness Upon Graduation, and Career Decision Making. They discuss the history of student loan debt in pharmacy education, Nick’s experience teaching personal finance to pharmacy students and why today’s graduates, more than ever, should be equipped with the knowledge and tools necessary to manage the pressures associated with large student loan debts.

About Today’s Guests

Nicholas “Nick” Hagemeier, PharmD, PhD, is Vice Chair and Associate Professor of Pharmacy Practice and Director of Student Professional Development at the East Tennessee State University Gatton College of Pharmacy. Dr. Hagemeier also serves as Director of ETSU’s Pharmacy Practice Research Fellowship. He earned his PharmD, MS, and PhD degrees from Purdue University. He was awarded NIH funding to conduct research on the role of pharmacists in preventing opioid-related morbidity and mortality and was appointed to the US Health and Human Services Pain Management Best Practices Interagency Task Force in 2018. He has published 44 peer-reviewed manuscripts and has presented his opioid and wellbeing research nationally. He is a graduate of the American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy Academic Leadership Fellows Program. He is currently serving as a Presidential Fellow at ETSU. Dr. Hagemeier has a passion for using communication to improve patient care, applying social/behavioral research in practice, and helping students thrive personally and professionally. In the College of Pharmacy, he champions wellbeing-promoting initiatives such as Phitness Phriday and the mentoring program. Dr. Hagemeier resides in Johnson City, Tennessee with his wife Molly and four children, Will (14), Clara, (12), Fritz (10), and Katie Ann (6). His hobbies include exercising with his F3 buddies, running, and playing the banjo.

Summary

Dr. Nick Hagemeier is an Associate Professor at the Gatton College of Pharmacy, East Tennessee State University. Nick shares that he made a lot of financial mistakes after graduation, but after taking a Dave Ramsey course at his church, his eyes opened and he paid off a lot of debt quickly, sold his new car and proceeded to go back to graduate school to get his PhD.

He and another colleague started a personal finance course in their college of pharmacy driven by a passion to equip pharmacy students with the knowledge they need to make smart decisions about their finances and student loans, even while still in school. Nick wanted to get data about if and how personal finance perceptions or the amount of student loans carried affected the careers or training that pharmacists took. Some colleagues at other colleges of pharmacy were also passionate about this topic and joined forces to conduct a study across three schools. They surveyed students at the beginning of their personal finance class and had 700 usable responses. Their hypothesis was that the amount of student loan indebtedness would impact postgraduate training. Through the survey they discovered that the actual student loan debt amount wasn’t predictive of pursuing postgraduate training, however the perception of debt pressure and stress associated with the debt was predictive. Nick was surprised by their findings and shares that this is modifiable and they are able to equip students with skills to manage their stress and debt.

You can read the full study here.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. I’m excited to welcome Dr. Nick Hagemeier, associate professor at the Gatton College of Pharmacy, East Tennessee State University, to talk about his findings from research he and colleagues published in the American Journal of Pharmaceutical Education assessing student pharmacists’ personal finance perceptions, projected indebtedness upon graduation, and career decision-making. Dr Hagemeier, welcome to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast.

Nick Hagemeier: Hey, Tim, thanks for having me. It’s a pleasure to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: Appreciate you taking the time to do this. I know it’s crazy times with schedules and wrapping up the academic year and COVID-19 and all that that brings, so thank you so much for taking time.
Nick Hagemeier: Absolutely.

Tim Ulbrich: So Dr. Hagemeier, when I read your research article that you and your colleagues published in AJHP, which we’ll link to in the show notes and I would encourage our listeners to check out for themselves, I knew that our community, the YFP community, would really take interest in what you found through this study So before we jump into the study and your findings, tell us about your work that you’re doing at ETSU right now and your career path leading up to your current position.

Nick Hagemeier: Oh, wow. Well you know, the work we do is ETSU, we have a personal finance elective that we have probably around 20 students will take that every fall semester.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Nick Hagemeier: And that’s been, you know, it’s been a huge blessing to me and Brian Cross, we’ve co-coordinated that class I think since 2013 now. And it’s probably — you know, we’ll tell the students in that class it’s our most fun class to teach because we know the impact that the knowledge that we’re sharing with them had on our lives and we know that it can be a game-changer for them. And you know, we’ll have students that buy in and actually will change their lives. And that’s something that keeps you coming back for more.

Tim Ulbrich: You know, and it reminds me, Nick, I’m guessing you get several of these emails from graduates. Perhaps in the moment it sticks, maybe it doesn’t, it’s a later point in time. It reminds me of Joe Baker we’ve had on the show teaches personal finance at UAMS in Harding. He’ll regularly hear from students about wow, the impact that this had on me later on or when they get to a later decision point about student loan debt or home buying or life planning or whatever, you know, it’s often planting seeds. That’s what I find, and I don’t know if that’s the same for you, but it’s often planting seeds. And some of those come to be in the moment in terms of the fruit, and sometimes it’s a little bit later on.

Nick Hagemeier: I absolutely agree. Yeah. We tell our students in that class that you know, probably the best time to do the course evaluation is about five years from now. But you’re right though that some of that seed will be planted right then, and it will be a game-changer for them while they’re in pharmacy school. That’s obviously our preference. But getting those thank you emails or just learning about the impact that it had years down the road, that’s awesome.

Tim Ulbrich: So tell us a little bit more, Nick, about your career path into your current position: where you did your training and I know you have some advanced degrees and training as well.

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah, I did my pharmacy degree at Purdue University. And then started trying to figure out what I wanted to do next. And I really didn’t have a good feel for that until my P4 year, and a mentor suggested that rather than residency training, which is what I thought I was going to pursue that I might want to consider a PhD. So I didn’t really know a whole lot about it at the time, to be honest. But I trusted his judgment and when you know who that person is, it was Nick Popevich. And he’s well known, a dear man, and I really think he had my best interests in mind. And he was right. And so that’s what I did. And I worked in the community pharmacy setting part-time during my Master’s degree and then stopped after my Master’s degree and worked full-time in the independent community pharmacy setting. I worked at a couple different pharmacies because my primary one didn’t have enough hours to support me. So I worked 30 at one and 11 hours at another. And did that for a few years and then transitioned into chain. And that was really — I don’t even know how to put it into words, you know. It really brought back my career aspirations and made me reflect on what do I really want to do? And I felt like I was stuck. I didn’t know anything about money. I had been — the example I give my students that just shows you how dumb I was about money is I had a note on my wife’s engagement ring. We were engaged in — we got married in 2002, engaged in 2001 I believe, 2002. And I had not paid anything on this note until 2009.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh, wow.

Nick Hagemeier: I just kept paying the interest. I mean, how silly is that? So I got — the church we were attending offered the Dave Ramsey course, and I’m like, well, I don’t know anything now. This really can’t hurt. And we took that course, and it was absolutely eye-opening for me. It really did change my life. And that’s what we tell the students, and Brian Cross has the same story. And we’re very transparent with the students about our ignorance, things that we did wrong as we were going through pharmacy school and then early in life. Eventually, I figured out how to get out of debt. I paid off a ton of debt over a very quick period of time, sold a car I had just bought — my only new car I’d ever owned, I sold that and got out of a ton of debt and figured out a way to make it work to go back to school so that I could do what I love doing. And that’s what I did. I went back to Purdue, got a PhD in 2009, graduated in 2011. And here I am at ETSU.

Tim Ulbrich: And I love, Nick, that you took your personal experience and you know, I always joke with my students the school of hard knocks is the best way to teach this topic.

Nick Hagemeier: That is for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think it makes you real. And I can tell the students appreciate that, I’m sure the same is for you and just that vulnerability and sharing that this is a topic, it’s so behavioral, and we are all constantly learning. We’re all constantly making mistakes, hopefully less over time. We hopefully do better over time. But it’s human behavior, you know, when it comes to personal finance and making mistakes. And I’m so glad to hear that you share those stories with your students. You know, I’ve tried to do the same, even though it’s hard to sometimes admit like oh my gosh, did I really do that? Did I really pay a note on an engagement ring for that period of time?

Nick Hagemeier: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: Did I really make that mistake? But I think it makes it real for the students, and I think it also allows them to see that hey, mistakes are going to happen and you continually learn, you pick yourself up and you move forward. And I also love that you have really been able to not only teach and give back to the students but also transition to moving some of this into the research space and being able to ask some really important questions that are having an impact on our student pharmacists, on our graduates and our profession as a whole. So let’s talk about this study, again, published in AJPE, “Student Pharmacists’ Personal Finance Perceptions, Projected Indebtedness Upon Graduation and Career Decision-Making.” Tell us a little bit about the purpose of this study. What led you to wanting to conduct a study about student pharmacists and the link between their indebtedness and their career decision-making process?

Nick Hagemeier: Well, I was fortunate to have some colleagues at other institutions that at that time that were just as passionate about this as I was. And I’m a data guy. I love anecdotes, I love good stories, but at the end of the day, I want to know are there data that support my assumptions or assertions that we’re going to make? So I had a little bit of a captive audience, and I had students that were willing to participate in this research, so I just wanted to try to figure out, you know, OK, I know I think personal finance influences decision-making, career decision-making, whether people are going to grad school or fellowships or residencies, you name it. And I just wanted to have some data to do that. And Chad Gentry had been at ETSU and he had been at Lipscomb, and Debbie Byrd was then at the University of Tennessee and now serves as our dean. But they were both doing work like this, and I reached out to them to see if they would be willing to participate in — actually some of this happened at an AACP meeting, just we were talking about this. And they both expressed interest that hey, they’d like to survey their students too. So I developed a survey instrument and kind of put it through the ringer here at ETSU, tweaked it a little bit early on, and then invited Chad and Debbie to participate as well. And so it was really cool that we got data from three different institutions. I think that’s a strength of the study as opposed to just having students at ETSU.

Tim Ulbrich: I do as well, and we’ll talk more about the potential for extrapolating some of that data to other colleges and students across the country. So tell us a little bit — you started to talk about three institutions, but tell us a little bit more about how you conducted the student, who specifically was evaluated, how they were evaluated, and the types of questions that you asked in the survey.

Nick Hagemeier: Sure. So we — I think an important point is that we surveyed the students right out of the gate, so right when we had them in a personal finance class. And it differed across institutions as to whether that was required or not. We surveyed them before we gave them any knowledge.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Nick Hagemeier: So we were trying to look at baseline, like how are you feeling? Like what are your perceptions about this? What are your self-efficacy beliefs or your confidence in your skill set related to personal finance? Wanted to know about their perceptions of debt and the pressure that goes along with that or can go along with that. So we developed this paper-based or web-based survey, depending on the institution, and the students took this at the beginning of the class and then we got the data back and we analyzed it here at ETSU. So we had P2s and P3s.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Nick Hagemeier: That were participating in this research; that varied across the institutions as well.

Tim Ulbrich: And tell us a little bit more, you mentioned one of the strengths, which I agree with, would be across multiple institutions. So thinking about the generalized ability of this data, tell us a little bit more about those three institutions and why that is a strength as we consider how this might apply to other colleges and other students across the country.

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah, so we could really separate out the data, you know, but I think that there is strength in the end there that you get from three different institutions. But you’ve UT, which is a public university. You’ve got Lipscomb, which is a private university. Then you’ve got ETSU, which is kind of the mutt, right? We’re a private college within a public university, which I don’t know if most people are aware of that or not.

Tim Ulbrich: I did not know that, no.

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah, so there were no state dollars to support ETSU opening a College of Pharmacy.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Nick Hagemeier: Back in the day, and the only college of pharmacy was in Memphis at UT. But it was a private model within a public university, so it’s a completely tuition-driven college. So I mean, you’ve got three different types of colleges, all three of those exist around the U.S. And we looked at common themes across all three of those.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. And from what I can remember, over 700 usable responses, really strong response rate, around 90%. So talk us through with that data in mind of the main findings of the study. And then we’ll talk about what those perhaps could mean and the implications of those.

Nick Hagemeier: Sure. So one of the things, and one of our hypotheses was that the amount of indebtedness, so the actual dollar amount, would impact post-grad training, pursuance direct entry into practice versus pursuing another path. And so that was one thing we were going to look at. And then something else that was interesting were just perceptions, right? Because you can have this dollar amount, but if you don’t pay any attention to it, maybe it doesn’t matter.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Nick Hagemeier: Maybe it doesn’t matter. And so we were interested in really both of those. And I was really interested in self-efficacy beliefs too because confidence, you know, confidence is really important. There’s all kinds of literature that shows that’s the case. Now, whether students are accurately reporting their confidence, if their confidence actually matches their ability, that’s another question. But those were some of the things that we were looking at. So I think the main finding here was that the actual student loan debt amount wasn’t predictive of pursuing post-grad training. But the perception of debt pressure and stress associated with that debt was predictive. So I think you know, that to me was — we didn’t anticipate finding that, but that was just a really interesting finding. And it’s really cool because that’s modifiable.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Nick Hagemeier: Right? We can equip students with some of the skills and knowledge that, just help them manage that stress, manage that debt, minimize that debt and therefore, position them to pursue the careers that they want to pursue.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that’s a really important point as we just summarized that as I understand it, Nick, to reiterate what you said, the actual indebtedness amount that they reported or projected indebtedness upon graduation didn’t have an impact on their career decision options they were considering for the future, but rather, the debt influence and pressure and their perception of that, which was a combination of how they responded to a series of questions around things like I’m concerned about my anticipated debt load, I feel pressure to get out of debt, my debt load factors in my career plans after I graduate, my debt load influences my decisions. So I think that perception, I’m so glad you assessed that because I think that’s been my experience in working with students as well as my personal experience, you know, sometimes the dollar amount, especially when we think about it from the student perspective, the actual dollar amount may not necessarily have hit them yet. But it may be weighing on their mind, and for students at different levels. You know, I’ll talk with some students sometimes that have $75,000-80,000 of projected debt and they’re very much thinking about the stress. And I’ll speak with others that maybe $250,000 or $300,000 of projected debt, and you know, it still feels like at that point Monopoly money and something that’s not top of mind.

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: One of the things I found really interesting — and I wanted to pick your brain on this — is when I was looking at the findings presented in the results section, Table 2, which was the pharmacy student personal finance constructs and perceptions, I was caught off guard — and these, as I understand it, were a series of questions they responded on a Likert Scale with a higher number essentially indicating a more favorable response and agreement. And as I looked at those, I was caught off guard by how high these responses were. So for example, questions like “I’m confident in my ability to manage my personal finances,” the mean was a 3.81. Again, 1-5 scale. “I’m confident in my ability to get out of debt,” 4.05. So to me, when I saw that, I feel like there’s perhaps some overconfidence here. I mean, can you speak to that and what you’ve seen either in other literature — I know from my experience looking at some of the vet med literature, which I know has published more in this area of personal finance, there’s a lot of data supporting the idea that perhaps overconfident in school and underestimating what impact that’s going to have in the future. So was there anything there that you took away to say maybe there is some overconfidence here in the response?

Nick Hagemeier: Well, I completely agree with you. You know, again, this is just anecdotal, but based on some of my experiences and conversations that I’ve had with students that I know responded a 4 or 5 on this, and you know, I’ll talk to them about, “OK, so you’re confident in your ability to develop a personal budget.” “Yes, I am.” “OK, what about like sticking to it?” “Oh, I don’t ever stick to it. But I can develop one.” So part of it’s in the items that I asked. But again, I think that this is something where a lot of students probably covered it in high school, they’re familiar with it. So there’s comfort in saying that I’m confident in things with which I’m familiar.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure. Yep.

Nick Hagemeier: But again, you mentioned in the beginning, it’s behavior-based. And man, some of these behaviors are so hard. And I do feel like this is a situation where they’re probably overconfident. I don’t think their behaviors, their knowledge or their skill set matches those high numbers that you see in the manuscript.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and one of the things I noticed too as I was looking at the data, again anecdotally talking from my experience working with students, is the item they rated the lowest on relative to the others was the statement, “I’m confident in my ability to choose appropriate investment option.” And I will say consistently when I talk with students about what’s the topic you feel least confident about and you want more information? It often is investing. And similarly, you know, I feel like that sometimes they feel perhaps overinundated with like student loan debt information but when I sit down and talk about repayment options and really dig into the weeds, I sense that there’s a feeling that they may not need that information. But once you dig in, they really have some of those Aha! moments of like oh my gosh, I had no idea of the implications of if I choose this one repayment option versus this and why this decision is so important. So I say this because I think it’s important — and we’ll talk more about this as we talk about next steps in personal finance education — I think it’s important we look at the responses and how students feel but also take a step back and layer on top of that what do we think they really need? And does their reported confidence in perhaps being ready to address and tackle the student loan debt, is that reality? Or do we still need to spend more time? Because I think it’s a topic that at the surface may not seem so overwhelming but can certainly be complicated when we think about the nuances of repayment and the implications it has with the rest of their financial plan.

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah, I agree. And we try to link them together. We try to talk about with our students, this ability to develop a budget, it may not seem that related to your ability to choose appropriate investment options.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nick Hagemeier: But wow, if you can figure out the budgeting part and maximize the amount that you can put towards your student loan debt and towards your investments and etc., etc., and then that really gets their attention. So it’s the linking them has been impactful.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Nick Hagemeier: From a teaching perspective. But yeah, I completely agree with you. It is important to pay attention to those numbers. And you know, in our class, we lovingly call them out if we feel like you’re overconfident. Well, that’s awesome, but your behaviors aren’t matching what your confidence levels. Yeah. They’re not matching.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure. Talk to us a little bit more about what you found in terms of their — the connection between this debt influence and pressure perceptions and their actual areas of training after graduation, whether that be the decision to pursue post-graduate training or not or even going into, say, a hospital practice versus chain community or supermarket mass-merchandiser type of practice.

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah, so we did a couple different models here. And this Table 3 in the manuscript, you see the unadjusted odds ratio, so that’s just looking at each one of these variables independently. And debt pressure perceptions are mentioned in there was a significant predictor there. It’s the only one that is. And we dumped them all into this soup together and looked at an adjusted odds ratio. And it still held there that debt pressure perceptions were the only significant predictor. Again, student loan debt, anticipated student loan debt at graduation wasn’t. When we looked at it from a — I mean, there’s significant overlap here, I will tell you that because you know, when we’re looking at community chain versus independent versus supermarket mass-merchandiser versus hospital. So most of your people that are going to pursue residency are going to be in that hospital bucket, right? So there’s some overlap here. But the debt pressure perceptions, they significantly predicted going into chain community as compared to going into hospital. OK? Which is just another way to say what we saw with pursuing post-graduate training or directly entering practice. We thought there might be differences across some of the higher paying, historically higher paying jobs that they’re in practice as compared to some that may not be. And we saw a little bit of that, but I mean the biggest difference was by far the hospital versus community chain.

Tim Ulbrich: So I know we’re conjecturing here a little bit, but taking this data and then thinking about what’s been evolving or changing in the last few years, and this is I think difficult because we look at the Bureau of Labor Statistics data as one way to track some of the workforce trends and obviously the salary trends of a pharmacist. I think it often leaves us wondering, well, for new practitioners, I know here at least in the Columbus, Ohio, area, we’re definitely seeing a trend where what might have been when I graduated in 2008 the community position as being more of the lucrative financial move, that is changing because of several companies making decisions to go back down to 32 hours, some more recently even cutting pay and some as recent with the COVID-19 situation and then obviously also just thinking about the relative flat nature of those salaries over time. So do you see this changing, this perception of students and what they viewed as perhaps the debt influence and perception impacting a decision that if I’ve got more debt, I might be thinking about more of the community space because of the financial benefit to that position? Do you think that’s a ship we’ll see going forward?

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah, that’s a great question. And you know, succinctly, I don’t really know.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nick Hagemeier: I think that there’s a lot more transparency and some of the other issues that have surfaced — and they were there when I was in chain as well — but some issues with patient safety and workload and things like that that I think are more in the media now, they’re more on the minds of our students. And I don’t think it’s as simple as dollars. I don’t have any data to support that, I just think that just based on some conversations with students, I think that this is really something that’s top of mind. And they’re realizing it’s a complex decision. And you’re right, Tim, all those things that you mentioned about salaries are flat at best and you know, there’s a lot of unknowns right now. So short answer is I don’t know.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nick Hagemeier: But I think that still, it to me, it just takes me back to this is all the more reason to help students figure out how to manage money in pharmacy school.

Tim Ulbrich: Amen.

Nick Hagemeier: So that they have the skill set to make decisions that are in the best interest of themselves and their loved ones and the people that they’re caring for. And you know, that’s something I’m really passionate about, and I just, I think that this is just driving home the point that this is really important now. Not when you get out, this is really important now. And we have a ton of success stories, and we’ll tell — we share with our students the success stories of previous students about — we’ve had students that were spending $1,200 a month eating out.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Nick Hagemeier: Like wow.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Nick Hagemeier: I’ve got a family of six, and our budget is $300. So you know, just kind of helping them see that and put some numbers with some of their behaviors. And then adjust it and then figure out hey, I’m not miserable. You know, I was actually able to save close to $10,000 over the course of an academic year. I mean, we’ve had just outrageously successful students that make game-changing decisions. And they don’t even recognize how big of changes those are yet. They won’t recognize that until they get out and can make those loan payments so much easier.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Nick Hagemeier: And see some of the fruits of their labor.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree, and it reminds me as you were talking, Nick, of I had Dr. Daniel Crosby on the show talking about his book, “The Behavioral Investor.” And he studies behavioral economics. Essentially, that’s his job is to look at all that and look at the research. And he talks a lot about the correlations between happiness and money and talks about that threshold where somewhere around the $70,000 mark where you’ve got enough to cover your basic living expenses and have a little bit of margin and breathing room. But after that, you start to see an inverse relationship happen. And I think that’s been my personal experience as well as so many students I’ve worked with is when they start to identify that point of OK, living on a budget and being able to do so so that I can achieve my goals and have some healthy level of restriction, again, not in a negative sense but in more intentional allocation of funds, like I think there’s actually an ironic happiness that comes from that, especially as you then start to be able to free up funds and do things that the literature does support provides happiness like giving and experiences and other things like that as well. So I love the passion for I think igniting this desire in students to learn. And let’s talk about that more because in the article, you mention that this study could serve as an intervention point for colleges so they can support student pharmacists and the debt pressure they face. Talk to us a little bit more about what you think that looks like in an ideal state in terms of how we best support our students. Is it a personal finance elective that’s kind of a one-and-done? Is it something more longitudinal where we hit them at multiple points in time? Is it required? Is it optional? What are your thoughts around this?

Nick Hagemeier: Well, I think that it could be a mixed bag. I mean, one thing that I think for sure is this is not a one dose and done. I think that this warrants discussion throughout the curriculum. And you know, it could certainly be an elective, and we have the elective here. But I have framed it in terms of wellbeing. I really like how Gallup defines wellbeing across the five domains with career or purpose, community, social, financial, physical. And I’m really defining that financial wellbeing for students the way that Gallup defines it, not in terms of the amount of money you make, but it’s more about security and living within your means. And that gets their attention. And we assess wellbeing frequently. So this is top of mind, this is something that our mentors will discuss with the mentees. So this is something that I kind of get the pleasure of championing this wellbeing initiative at ETSU and the mentoring program. So I’ve kind of got a built-in mechanism to facilitate conversations with students and do so on a regular basis. Now, that doesn’t mean that necessarily all of our faculty are equipped to have those conversations. But again, they know they’ve got resources in the elective and in Brian Cross and myself to get them help if they need it. So I don’t know that there’s a necessarily like a magic way or a best way. I don’t think we have the evidence to support that. But I do think that, you know, I would prefer it be if possible to get it in front of all the students and for people that have access to students to think of creative ways to frame it. You know, wellbeing, I think students were less familiar with that than they are money. And so framing it in that way I think has worked to our benefit — and I don’t know if they know it or not yet, but theirs as well.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nick Hagemeier: That’s been our approach, and I think that that’s worked pretty well.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree with you wholeheartedly. And I think we don’t yet have the evidence to say this is the best approach. I mean anecdotally and my gut says I feel like it’s something that’s more longitudinal in nature and that really meets the students where they are. So as I think about the financial needs of an incoming P1, you know, to me, really understanding like the anatomy of a student loan is really important because I think — again, I don’t have the literature to back this up — but I think if you really understand the anatomy of a loan and interest and the types of loans, that likely might help shift your behavior while you’re in school and obviously have long-term impacts afterwards. Whereas we think about like P4, OK, they’re getting ready to enter obviously into that new practitioner phase, get ready to go into active repayment, a lot of the decisions resulting in the debt load they have at the moment have been made. But they’re now entering a different phase of how do I actually manage this debt? And then obviously other decisions, investing and life planning and all those other things. So I think something more longitudinal in nature. The other thing we talk a lot about, Nick, at Ohio State is how do we customize this? You know, I think and I sense that this resonates with the learner, which I think is true in learning in general — but how do we customize this, especially when we’re talking about a topic that is so inherently personal, right? So if we know the literatures shows about 15% of students graduate without student loan debt, so if we do have education materials, well, for those students, you know, how do we engage them in other topics that are most meaningful? Or we know that students come in with a very different baseline understanding of this topic, perhaps that they had in their home life or previous coursework that they’ve taken, so how do we provide some base education for all students but then almost allow like a choose-your-own adventure based on the goals that they have as well as the existing knowledge and experiences they’ve had?

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah, that’s — I mean, those are great thoughts. And I think that you know, something that I’ve — again, I don’t necessarily know that I have the evidence. I think I do, but the knowledge versus skill. Completely knowledge-based experience or whatever that might be, I just don’t think it’s going to be that impactful.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nick Hagemeier: You know, just like me sitting in a CE program that’s completely knowledge-based, to what extent am I actually going to take that and use it? It’s tough because it involves behavior change. So for the most — you know, our first stop is the budget and that basic behavior. And from there, because we’ve seen students that don’t have any student loan debt. But they don’t know how to do a budget.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Nick Hagemeier: There’s just some very basic things. But if we can meet students where they are, that would be fantastic. That’s probably easier said than done.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nick Hagemeier: But it’s worth trying to do.

Tim Ulbrich: And we’ve had a little bit of success, I think the online space has allowed us to do a little bit more of that, of the customization of learning that we may not be able to do as much in the classroom. But I think it’s just a good reminder for hopefully we have some colleges and faculty listening about collaborating and here, we’re sharing ideas but others doing the same. Nick, the last question I have for you is in the background of the article, you talk about how an educational investment is composed of both a monetary investment, so tuition, and an opportunity cost, time spent in school. So if we look at the sharp increase in student loan debt in pharmacy education, so 2010 the median indebtedness of a graduate for those that had debt was $100,000. 2019, that was $170,000. So just a nine-year period, $70,000 increase. What advice would you have for high school students, undergrad students that are evaluating this educational investment? They’ve determined that pharmacy is the career path for them, they want to be a pharmacist. But they also see what’s ahead of them in terms of this educational investment. What suggestions would you have for them?

Nick Hagemeier: Wow. That’s a really good question. Actually, I just before recording this, Tim, had a talk with some students from academic APPE. And one of the questions that they asked me was what advice would you give to high school students that are interested in pursuing pharmacy, given the current landscape? Which isn’t a whole lot different than the question you just asked. And my response was that they need to look at what it is about the profession that just really lights a fire in them. And then try to figure out — like do some research and try to figure out, you know, can I expect that that’s going to be present in this profession when I graduate? It’s changing so fast. And you know, I think that the more exposure that we can get students to different careers in pharmacy and informing them — you know, and AACP has done a good job of this here in recent years, of just trying to show what can a pharmacist actually do? Because there’s so many misperceptions there. But I think that thinking beyond what they see currently in the profession to what it could be. And then seeing if they’ve got the passion to drive it to what it could be, that’s hard work. That’s my — I think that’s my best way of answering that question. It’s so hard. There’s so many different biases that I have there and different life experiences that influence that. You know, would I do this again? Yup. But I would do it in a lot more informed manner. I kind of took the scenic route and made a lot of dumb decisions along the way. You know, looking back, I could have done this a lot better.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I agree with you. And I think as you define that, you know, in the article in terms of the educational investment, I think that — I didn’t think about it that way. And I agree with you. I could have made the same decision, I think I would have just made a little bit more of a straight path, which is easy to say, right, in hindsight?

Nick Hagemeier: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: But I think when you think about your investment and I would say tuition as well as cost of living — because we see so much of the actual indebtedness is cost of living that’s taken out on unsubsidized loans that are accruing interest — and then the opportunity cost, I mean obviously that time spent, that variable you may or may not be able to impact in a significant way. But the cost of getting there and how you get there and how you minimize the indebtedness, which obviously impacts what it looks like on the back end, I think is certainly a variable that the student, prospective student, can change but also that we on the side of the education part can also help our students be able to navigate that in a little bit better way.

Nick Hagemeier: Yeah, I absolutely agree. And you know, just reflecting on my response to that question, if I would have taken the more direct route, I wouldn’t have struggled in all these areas of wellbeing, you know? And then I’m thinking, well, shoot, then maybe I wouldn’t even be able to have that much of an impact on students now and helping them succeed financially.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nick Hagemeier: So then now I’m like, well, maybe I don’t regret what I did.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Nick Hagemeier: You know, I made some dumb decisions so that you don’t have to and helping students appreciate that and helping them figure out as a high school student that your career starts — when you’re in college, consider that a career. And helping them think about money and you mentioned too that the opportunity cost, the amount of dollars that have to be borrowed or that can be borrowed aren’t necessarily the amount of dollars that you need to borrow and helping them understand that on the back side. I’ll tell you, one thing that we’ve done that’s been really impactful and it’s kind of funny, but I don’t know, Tim, do you all have Cookout up there?

Tim Ulbrich: No.

Nick Hagemeier: The restaurant? OK. It’s a little fast food restaurant that’s really close to the chain, and it’s really close to the college pharmacy. A lot of students go there. And so we’ve kind of — you mentioned like the anatomy of a student loan and the interest. We’ve taken that and applied it to eating at Cookout. So Cookout is known for their $4.99, you can get all you want for $4.99 there. And then trying to take that out over OK, so you’re using that $4.99, that’s borrowed money. Right? So if it’s not, let’s pretend that it is. And then I’m going to choose an interest rate that’s pertinent now for student loans and we’re going to look at that over a 10-year. How much is your Cookout actually costing you when you’re paying it back in 10 years? OK, what about if you do it on a 25-year loan? And holy smokes, they just like are like, “I don’t think I even want to go to Cookout anymore.”

Tim Ulbrich: Right? Right.
Nick Hagemeier: Just helping them realize some of those everyday decisions that they’re making and what that looks like in terms of loan anatomy and futuring. That can be really impactful and at least evokes an emotional response in them, which I think is something that’s necessary to really have impact here.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree, I love how you teach that because it makes it real, right? That’s something they deal with every day. Maybe not every day, but you know, every week or however often they go. And I think making this topic that can seem so big, so overwhelming, especially when you’re talking about big numbers of what you’re going to pay back over 10 or 25 years, but saying OK, the decisions you’re making today, what does that look like? What impact does that have? And really trying to make it as tangible as possible. And I love, Nick, what you said, you know, one of the things that people ask me all the time is, would you have done things differently? Absolutely, I would have done a lot of things differently. Do I regret the path that I’ve taken? And my answer is no, for the exact reason that you mentioned, that learning through those decisions and then being able to teach and influence others, like I think it’s worth it. Would I have done it differently? Yes. Do I regret it? No. So I appreciate so much, Nick, your passion for this topic. I appreciate you taking time to come on the show to discuss your journey and the article that you published in AJPE, “Student Pharmacists Personal Finance Perceptions, Projected Indebtedness upon Graduation, and Career Decision-Making.” So thank you so much, Nick.

Nick Hagemeier: Absolutely. Thanks, Tim. I really appreciate being here.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 150: New Book: The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans


New Book: The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans

Tim Church talks about the release of his most recent book, The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans: How to Confidently Choose the Best Payoff Strategy That Saves You the Most Money.

This book is available for a special preorder until May 7 which includes exclusive bonuses like free shipping, discounted pricing and a free Conquer Loans t-shirt (with certain packages).

About Today’s Guests

Tim is the Director of Getting Things Done at Your Financial Pharmacist and a clinical pharmacy specialist at the West Palm Beach VA Medical Center.

He is also the author of The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans: How to Confidently Choose the Best Payoff Strategy That Saves You the Most Money , Seven Figure Pharmacist: How to Maximize Your Wealth, Eliminate Debt, and Create Wealth and When Eating Right Isn’t Enough: The Top 5 Medications to Control Your Type 2 Diabetes.

Summary

On this episode, Tim Church dives into his newest book The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans: How to Confidently Choose the Best Payoff Strategy That Saves You the Most Money. He shares that although he was happy when he and his wife hit submit on their last student loan payment, feelings other than happiness began to set in. They paid off $400,000 of student loans in 5 years, however he didn’t know enough about his options for repayment and ended up paying $100,000 more by not choosing PSLF.

The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans: How to Confidently Choose the Best Payoff Strategy That Saves You the Most Money is a comprehensive guide for pharmacists and pharmacy students. Tim’s goal of writing the book is that a pharmacist can pick it up, analyze their options and choose a strategy and plan that will best align with their financial and life goals.

This book is available for a special preorder until May 7 at midnight (ET). Included with the preorder are bonuses that won’t be available after May 7 like a free Conquer Loans t-shirt (with certain packages), free shipping and discounted pricing.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. I welcome back our very own Tim Church to talk about his most recent book, “The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans: How to confidently choose the best payoff strategy that saves you the most money.” Tim Church, welcome back on the show.

Tim Church: Thanks, Tim. Always on a pleasure to be on this side of the mic.

Tim Ulbrich: So excited to have you on. It’s been a long time in the making. You’ve been working hard on this book and excited to talk about the work that you have done. And I know it’s going to be a piece that’s going to help so many in their own repayment strategy. And we recently had you and Andria on the show to talk about your journey paying off $400,000 of debt in five years. And so if you’re listening to this episode and you haven’t checked out yet that episode, hit pause, go back and listen to that show, their story. I think it’s going to be an inspiration to you and will be a nice lead-in to what we’re going to talk about this week as it relates to Tim’s book, “The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans: How to confidently choose the best payoff strategy that saves you the most money.” So Tim, I want to start by reading a passage from the beginning of the book, and I think you articulate so well the reality that so many pharmacy students and graduates and new practitioners are facing. So let me read a passage here from the book. “I’ll never forget the day my wife and I finally paid off our student loan debt. In fact, we still have a screenshot of the $0 loan balance. We are overjoyed, to say the least. We felt accomplished. We felt relieved. Finally, we did it. Andria and I had conquered the $400,000 of student loan debt that plagued us right from the start of our marriage. $400,000 gone. No more saying no to everything, no more anxiety about doing things we wanted to do while still funding our financial goals. No more payments. And my wife was ready to finally get a cat. The deep sacrifices we made to limit our spending finally paid off, and we were so ready to move on with our lives. But once that highly anticipated moment had come and gone, feelings other than happiness and relief set in, ones that I didn’t necessarily expect or want. I was angry and frustrated, and I had some major regrets.” Tim, what do you mean? Major regrets? Talk to us about that.

Tim Church: Yeah. When you say it out loud, it sounds like maybe I have like a mental health issue. But the reality is when I look back at the situation, you know, obviously we like to look at the numbers and things like that. And the reality is I was very fortunate to be in a position where I work for the government. And I had the option of going for the Public Service Loan Forgiveness program. That was definitely on the table, no questions about whether I qualified or not. But the problem was I didn’t really know that much about it at the time and all of the financial advice that I had been getting was kind of like steer clear from that. You don’t know, there’s a lot of unknowns with it. But when I actually sat down and did the math and found out that really, it was $100,000 decision that I made — meaning that I could have came out with a much better position because of how much I would have to pay for the loans versus the way that I did it. So once that hit my mind, it was kind of like, oh my gosh. Like you could have been in a much better position than you are today. So although it was awesome to get that feeling that the loans are gone and out of my life, it could have looked a lot different. And I think that’s really where those feelings started to come into play.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, I don’t know if you remember — I was just reflecting back as you were talking. Do you remember we were in Baltimore several years ago, we were working on some student loan content, and you and I broke out the calculator and realized what we could have saved through PSLF. And you know, when we both did that, we’re like oh my gosh. This was a six-figure decision in terms of what this cost us. You know, I think that really lit a fire for both of us and really making sure people understand the repayment options that are available to them. And ideally, those that are transitioning out from student to new practitioner, getting ready to go through that grace period and that active repayment, that is the time to really understand your options and make sure that you’ve got the best payoff strategy in place for your situation. And that’s what really this book is all about. So Tim, why write this book? I mean, there’s lots of information out there, lots of opinions out there on student loans. Why invest the time, the energy — we know it’s no small feat — why do it? Why write this book?

Tim Church: Well, I think looking back, when we wrote “Seven Figure Pharmacist” three years ago, student loans were definitely a part of that, but there was just so much more to say. So many more details and things that’s important for people to know. And I think just through the YFP community, through the Facebook page and our channels that we just continue to get questions come through about student loans. It’s probably one of the hottest topic that we see come through the community. We talk a lot about it on the podcast. But it just keeps coming up. And I thought, what if we could take all of our information that we’ve done through blog posts, podcasts, what if we could take that all together and make it into a consolidated resource that although has a lot of complicated and complex information but make it in a way that’s easy to digest and ultimately helps somebody pick this up, read it, and say, “OK. I know what my options are. I’ve got a plan in place. And I’m confident about that plan.” And that ultimately was the goal of creating this.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, I can tell you you accomplished that. As I read through it, a couple thoughts came to mind. One, you have taken an incredibly complex, difficult topic and not only have communicated it and taught it in an easy-to-understand way but ultimately help the reader navigate and get to that point of, OK, I have all this information, how do I apply that to my personal situation and choose the option that’s best for me? And I think you did an incredible job in doing that. And that certainly is no easy feat. So kudos to getting that done. Chapter One is “Get Organized.” And one of the things you say is “Before jumping in to student loan payoff strategies and developing an overall game plan, it’s important to know exactly how much you owe and who you owe.” So Tim, why is this so important? And how can people get started when it comes to this concept of getting organized with your student loans?

Tim Church: Yeah, I mean, you really have to know what you’re facing before you can even talk about what your options are because those options are largely dependent on the types of loans that you have, also your employer as well. But really getting down into the specific types of loans one has, how much those loans are, the interest rates, all of those things are really important as you break this down. Most pharmacists that are graduating are going to have federal loans. So loans that are funded through the Department of Education and then through one of their servicers. So that information is available through the NSLDS. So there’s a number of different ways that people can get that information on their federal loans. But the easiest way is to go to StudentAid.gov and log in and put in your information and then whether you’re looking at their loan simulator or just your account itself, you can get a really nice quick snapshot of all of your loans that you have that are outstanding, your servicers, your interest rates, that kind of thing. And then some people beyond federal loans, they’re going to have private loans as well, and that’s — I mentioned in the last podcast episode that I had some private loans through undergrad that I still had to consider when I was paying back everything. Although they had a similar servicer, they were not — they were private loans, some of them were. So they have a little bit different in terms of the strategy that you’re going to consider for those. And then I think other people, sometimes they forget do they have loans to family members? And I think it’s really important to keep that in mind too because all those things are going to play into when you develop that strategy and come up with all of those options.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, as I read Chapter Two, “The Key Payoff Strategies,” you know, the first thought that came to mind was, my gosh, I wish I would have had this as I was in school or navigating residency, you know, going through that period of ultimately should I defer? Should I not? I’m in the grace period, I need to choose. And I ended up going the standard, default 10-year repayment. I’m grateful we got through them quicker than that, but it really cost us a lot of money as we already talked about. I could have went PSLF, I could have refinanced. So unfortunately, this is so difficult to navigate. You do a great job in Chapter Two talking about the key payoff strategies. My question here for you is there a common mistake or two that you see pharmacists making when it comes to their student loans and the repayment strategy and decision that they make?

Tim Church: I think the biggest one, Tim, is when I ask somebody, I say, “Well, what is your student loan strategy?” And they’ll come back to me and they’ll say, “Well, I’m in the standard 10-year payment,” or, “I’m on an extended repayment plan,” or, “I’m on Revised Pay As You Earn repayment plan.” And I say, “Well, that’s not what I asked. I said, I asked what your strategy was.” And this big misconception as to repayment plans being strategies I think is the biggest mistake that I see people make. And whether it’s through the federal system or a private lender, your repayment plan is just dictating what the minimum payments are for a specific term. It’s not necessarily an overarching strategy on how you’re going to best tackle your student loans. Now, when you pick one of those strategies, you may utilize one of those repayment plans as the way that you’re navigating that strategy. But that’s not the strategy itself. You have to really look at what is the math behind the overall strategy? And when we talk about some of the big ones, you know, there’s forgiveness, there’s non-forgiveness, and that’s basically kind of opened the door to anything else that’s out there that isn’t a forgiveness option. And then within that, there’s obviously many options, whether you pay it off through the federal government or whether you refinance and pay it through a private lender. And then within those options, you have the different repayment plans. But even though you’re committed to a repayment plan doesn’t mean you have to make those payments. You could make extra on those payments. So there’s really — you have to look very broadly about what those options and strategies are. And then you have to really get tactical about how you’re going to execute those.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff. And let’s talk about one of those options in a little bit more detail: PSLF, which you talk about in Chapter Three, “Public Service Loan Forgiveness.” And we know that many pharmacists like you may be eligible but haven’t chosen this path for a variety of reasons. Perhaps they’re not aware, they’re scared of the unknown, they don’t want these loans hanging around for 10 years. And as you say in the book, “It’s honestly hard to find anything positive in the media about the program, especially when 99% of borrowers who apply for PSLF are denied.” So my question to you is why are we even talking about it? You know, when you look at a headline like that, where does PSLF come to play? And is this an option that perhaps more people should be considering?

Tim Church: Yeah, I mean, it’s hard to argue with the math behind PSLF. If you have standard student loan payments that you’re coming out with, you know, the average pharmacist is going to borrow around $170,000. For a private school, it’s going to be much more, when you look at the amount forgiven and the amount that you have to pay over that time, you just can’t argue with the math. I mean, there’s simply — unless you’re getting a tuition reimbursement plan where they’re basically just giving you free money, even if you were to refinance and pay the loans off faster with lower interest rates, you’re still never going to be able to compete from a math perspective with what you’re going to get if your loans are forgiven after 10 years, mainly because that amount forgiven is going to be tax-free. So it’s not going to be counted as income, any amount forgiven. But then also, within PSLF, you have options to even lower your student loan payments as you’re building your net worth and as you’re putting money in retirement accounts since your payments are going to be based upon your Adjusted Gross Income. So you just really can’t argue with the math. The only time that it really doesn’t make sense if you came out with a very small debt load where nothing would even be forgiven if you were making payments.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and for those that are wondering about PSLF, you know, should I be pursuing it? Should I consider it? Or in it and making sure they want to cross their t’s and dot their i’s, I would highly encourage you to get a copy of the book. I think it’s one of those things that has gotten a lot of negative press. And to be fair, I don’t think they’ve done a great job promoting the program. There hasn’t been consistent information and advice, especially from some of the student loan servicing companies. But I think as we’re starting to see this program evolve and obviously we’re now — let’s see, it started in 2007, first group 2017 have forgiveness, we saw a lot of negative press come out then. I think we’re going to start to see more and more people that are applying for and receiving forgiveness and hopefully some of it we’ll be able to feature on the show here soon as well. So make sure you get your information, make sure you know what you’re trying to do from a strategy standpoint but also that you’re following all the PSLF rules as that, of course, is critically important. Tim, in Chapter Five — and we’re just scratching the surface of some of the things that you talk about in much, much more detail in the book — Chapter Five, “Non-forgiveness and Refinancing.” So you know, essentially if somebody does not choose the forgiveness route, whether that be PSLF or non-PSLF — and we’re not going to talk about non-PSLF here, but you talked about it more in the book — if they don’t choose forgiveness, we’re really looking at a good old strategy of just paying them off. So what options then exist here in the federal and the private sector if somebody is not choosing the forgiveness route?

Tim Church: Yeah, I think this is a tough one to consider because you have so many different options in terms of repayment plans and whether or not you keep your loans with the federal government or whether you refinance with a private lender. But then not only that, you have to determine your strategy in terms of what does your timeline look like? So you could accomplish the same timeline whether that’s through federal or private. But you have to really then take this in context with all of your financial goals since largely, it’s going to depend on when you pay this off is your payments that you make towards it. So obviously the bigger your payments that you make, the faster you’re going to pay off your debt. However, the more that you pay towards your student loans, there’s obviously an opportunity cost to other financial goals such as retirement, saving money for a house, going on more vacations from a lifestyle perspective. So I think this one is really tough because yes, you may choose a repayment plan. But what is actually your strategy within that repayment plan or within whether you’re paying them off federally or through a private lender? So this is really where you see all of those blog posts, all of those discussions, should I invest while I pay off my student loans? Should I buy a house while I pay off my student loans? And really, you know, there isn’t one correct answer that you’re going to find out there. So part of this is somewhat subjective. But within that chapter, I put some key points in there to really consider as you’re doing this because I think it can help figure out how far fast forward — how much do you want to fast forward that timeline? How fast do you want to pay them off? And you know, if you’ve listened to the podcast episode that my wife and I did, you know, for us, we were kind of in this situation once forgiveness, we decided against it at some point, which I didn’t really understand, but basically for us, you know, we decided we were going to get our matches through our retirement 401k equivalents and then also do an HSA. So we kind of decided to do both. You know, other people you’ve had on the podcast, they’ve basically every single extra dollar they had went towards their student loans. So obviously there’s some subjectiveness to figuring that out, but I think there’s also some considerations you have to put in there. You know, obviously if you’re somebody who is just out of school and maybe is more of a traditional age and has a lot of time to prepare for retirement and other life events, then you’re a little bit more aggressive. But that might — you may not have — time may not be a luxury that you have if you’re more of a nontraditional student that’s graduating. So there’s a lot of different I think considerations that help decide and guide you where you want to fall on that timeline.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I love what you said there, Tim, is that there is no one right repayment strategy. I mean probably one of the most common questions we get, you know, whether it’s submitted through the Facebook group or an email or when we’re speaking or through the podcast, whatever, is hey, what’s the best repayment option or strategy? And you know, our answer is uh, depends, right? It depends. And what I love about what you’ve done with the book is you go through all of the options. But again, you present it in a way that if someone can layer their personal information on top of those options as well as how they feel and other life factors and other goals that you’re trying to achieve, when you get to the end of the book, the goal is that you’ve identified that one repayment option or strategy that is best for your personal situation and you can feel confident in executing that plan going forward. And speaking, Tim, of how to manage debt repayment with competing financial goals, I think you do an awesome job of this in Chapter Seven, talking exactly about that. How do you manage competing financial goals with student loans? You know, and here we’re thinking about — as you mentioned — obviously home buying or retirement. So talk to us a little bit about if you were sitting down with somebody who was reading this book, what would you not necessarily advise them, but what would you encourage them to think about as they’re trying to make this decision of should I go all in? Should I go in Tim and Andria Church-style of $6,667 per month on average to pay off $400,000 over five years? And I know you guys did a little bit of balancing of other things. Or should I spread this out among other things that I’m trying to achieve? How would you talk somebody through this debate of how do I compete multiple financial goals while I’m also thinking about debt repayment?

Tim Church: I mean, I think the first thing I would ask is how emotionally weighing are the loans? I mean, for a lot of people — and there’s studies out there that show this, that student loan debt can cause you to have insomnia, it can cause depression and other emotional situations for people. So I think that actually has to be part of that equation because if you’re somebody that really is being affected and even though you have the knowledge and equip yourself, despite knowing that, it’s not going to change some of those negative thoughts and feelings you have, then obviously that is something that has to go in when you’re figuring that out in the context of all your other financial goals. I think some of the other things are do you have really high interest debt that you’re comanaging with student loans? So if you’ve got credit card debt, you know, in the 20%, 15%, I mean, you have to really look at other high-interest debt and maybe knocking that out first before you go really aggressively. And you know, the other thing I think about is an emergency fund. I mean, along the way when Andria and I were being super aggressive with our student loans, I mean, we had some things come up that we never expected. So we had big car repair payments that we had to make. You know, one time I think Andria’s car was like $3,000. She has a Volkswagen Rabbit and there was some like very specific part that you had to get from the dealer or something like that, and it was just crazy. So it was like a huge hit. So we’ve had that, we had some medical issues come up along the way. So I think before you’re going to go super aggressive, I think you have to make sure you have a cushion there in case anything else comes up because even if you’re planning to pay your student loans off on a specific timeline, I mean, there’s really other life events that can come up that can kind of knock you off whatever your anticipated payoff date is going to be.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s great. We’ve talked a little bit about that earlier on the show, I want to say back in the 20s. It might have been 026, Baby Stepping into a Financial Plan, thinking about things like consumer debt and emergency funds and how those fit in as really building that foundation in which you lay upon student loan repayment strategies, investing and home buying, other goals that you’re trying to achieve. One of the things too, Tim — and I want to just mention for a moment knowing the times we’re in right now obviously with the COVID-19 pandemic, in Chapter Nine, you talk about how to handle student loans during job loss or hardship. And I think this really comes at a good time. And we’re going to be supplementing the book as well with some additional information related to the CARES Act and student loans specific to this moment in time that we’re in. But I think this is an area that we don’t talk a whole lot about. You know, we talk about those that are doing well, making big, big, big student loan payments, but we don’t talk about those that might be in a situation that job loss, hardship, and how do you handle that? So what words of encouragement would you have for folks that are — find themselves in the moment in a financial hardship or in a job loss situation about what options they have related to their student loans?

Tim Church: Yeah, it’s a great question, Tim. And unfortunately, a lot of people have been in that situation. And some people have defaulted on their loans, and it can get as bad as having your wages garnished. I mean, there’s really a lot of power that the federal government has in terms of taking money from you if you’re delinquent. But the reality is that things are going to come up and some people, even pharmacists, are going to face these situations. Now, I think the good news is that if you have federal student loans that there are a lot of options within there to kind of temporarily manage the situation. So hopefully whatever the situation may be, it’s just a temporary one and you need to kind of put pause on your student loan plan and strategy and just kind of make it until you can either find another job, get your income back up, or whatever that issue may be that you’re dealing with. So I think the easiest one — well, let me take a step back. I think it also depends on kind of what your strategy is because that may also dictate some of the things that you’re doing. So fortunately that if you’re in a forgiveness plan, you’re going to make income-driven repayments. So those may also — those may already be somewhat manageable, so maybe nothing really changes for you in the meantime if you’re able to at least make those payments. So I think that’s always a great option on what to do because if you can still make those payments, especially if you’re in forgiveness, they still may actually count, depending on what your situation is. But you know, last resort, if you can’t make a payment, even on an income-driven, they do have forbearance where basically you can put pause on making any payments on your student loans. Interest will accrue during that time. However, this is — I’m talking about this aside from what’s currently happening with COVID where this is an unprecedented situation where it’s more of an administrative forbearance where interest doesn’t accrue and you don’t have to make student loan payments during this time. So it’s a little bit different. So I think you have definitely quite a few options if your loans are held by the Department of Education. Now if you have private loans, the equation changes quite a bit because you’re really dependent upon whatever that private lender, what they have established. Now they may be willing to work with you, so it may be some kind of a forbearance option and maybe a change in the term or the repayment plan that you’re currently on, and some of the refinancing companies, they do offer income-driven repayment options or somewhat of a forbearance. So there are some that have options, but it’s really up to them in determining what they can do for you at a particular time. So really depends on that situation. But yeah, I mean, the good news is that a lot of these situations are temporary. But there are options that exist. And that’s kind of what we talk about in the chapter is like really trying to think through how can you have the most minimal impact on what your overall strategy is because like I said, you may have to just put pause on it for the time being.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I think you do a great job of that in Chapter Nine, How to Handle Student Loans During Job Loss or Hardship, and I think again, a good consideration — hopefully certainly we don’t want people to be in that situation, but if they are, to understand the options that are available. So there you have it, the latest from Tim Church, “The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans: How to confidently choose the best payoff strategy that saves you the most money.” And so if you’re somebody listening that you feel overwhelmed with your student loans or perhaps confused by the repayment plans that exist, many of which we talked about here today, if you’re unsure if the strategy you have in place is the best one, or maybe you’re feeling anxious about how to handle student loans during residency or during a financial hardship, this book is for you. It takes a very complicated topic, presents it an easy-to-understand and actionable way, all customized for the pharmacy professional, and written by somebody who’s done it. No theory, no case studies, but actual execution. So again, you can head on over to PharmDLoans.com and for the next week, you can pre-order your copy where you can get free shipping, reduced pricing, and access to exclusive bonuses. So Tim, I’m going to end with this quote from the very end of the book, which I think is a great summation of our conversation. You say, “Whether you’re facing $50,000 or $400,000 in student loan debt, the bottom line is you have options. Having clarity about your plan can take an immense weight off your shoulders, allowing you to focus on other financial goals and live your life. I know firsthand how difficult and overwhelming it can be looking at six figures of debt right in the face and trying to figure out what to do. Be intentional. Develop a plan. Execute. And adapt as necessary. And then enjoy the security and financial freedom of paying off those loans.” So Tim, congratulations on your work in this book. And thank you so much for taking time to come on the show to talk about it.

Tim Church: Thanks, Tim.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 149: Crushing $400k of Debt in 5 Years


Crushing $400k of Debt in 5 Years

Tim and Andria Church join Tim Ulbrich to talk about their journey paying off $400,000 of debt in 5 years. They share their motivation behind such an aggressive repayment strategy, how they did it and their plans now that they are debt free.

About Today’s Guests

Tim Church is the Director of Getting Things Done at Your Financial Pharmacist and a clinical pharmacy specialist at the West Palm Beach VA Medical Center.

He is also the author of Seven Figure Pharmacist: How to Maximize Your Wealth, Eliminate Debt, and Create Wealth and When Eating Right Isn’t Enough: The Top 5 Medications to Control Your Type 2 Diabetes.

Andria Church is a pharmacist and Assistant Professor of Pharmacy Practice at Palm Beach Atlantic University. She specializes in neuropsychiatric pharmacy. She is a native Floridian and an alum of the University of Florida and Palm Beach Atlantic University. Andria is also the one in the relationship that made sure fun money was set aside in the budget.

Summary

Tim Church, YFP’s Director of Getting Things Done, and his wife Andria join Tim Ulbrich on this week’s episode. Tim and Andria are both pharmacists and had a combined debt load of $400,000 in student loans. On this episode, they share their journey of why paying off the loans was important to them, how they paid it all off in 5 years, the hardships along the way and what their plans are now that loans are gone.

Tim and Andria expressed being on the same page financially was crucial for the success of their marriage. They had a lot of conversations about their finances before they were engaged. While Tim expresses that he may have not had the best approach to talking about how to tackle their debt, they found a balance that worked for them.

Their why behind paying off $400,000 so quickly came back to other financial goals they had with wanting to give generously, save for a house, have a family in the future, plan for retirement and be able to provide for their children and future generations of their family. When they had a difficult time with the sacrifices they were making to take down their debt, they would come back to their why to keep them motivated.

In order to achieve such an audacious goal, Tim explains that they had to pull every lever they could. To start, they minimized their expenses and didn’t make any big purchases. Andria and Tim lived in a one-bedroom apartment for the first 3 years of their marriage, didn’t have car loans and didn’t acquire any new debt. Then, they looked at how they could earn additional income. Tim took on overtime opportunities at the VA when it was available, worked special projects and had a moonlighting position for a year. All of this additional income was thrown at their loans. They also took advantage of whatever windfall money came their way, like bonus checks, and put it right toward their debt. Finally, Andria and Tim refinanced their loans multiple times over the course of 5 years locking in a lower interest rate each time. Of course, they also had to make sacrifices along the way. Andria explains that they didn’t take lavish trips, eat out a lot, or buy new clothes and accessories. While this was trying at times, Andria said that they had to check themselves to make sure they weren’t playing the comparison game with others in their field and had to remind each other that they were doing what was best for their future together.

Now that the debt is paid off, Tim and Andria feel like a giant weight has been lifted. They are focusing on padding their emergency fund, saving for a house and are hopeful they can give to those in need.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. It’s an honor to have joining me Tim and Andria Church to talk about their debt-free story and their journey of payin goff $400,000 of debt in five years. I’ve been waiting for this day to come for some time. Such an awesome story of persistence, of working together and how a clear why can help be the necessary motivation when you have such a big, long-term goal such as paying off $400,000 of debt. So Tim and Andria, welcome to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast.

Tim Church: Hey, Tim. Thanks for having us.

Andria Church: Hi. Yeah, we’re excited.

Tim Ulbrich: So glad. And Tim, I don’t even know if welcoming — it’s your own podcast. I don’t even know if that’s like the right term. But excited to have you on.

Tim Church: Well, it’s nice to be on the other end sometimes.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right. So Tim Church, take us back to the beginning. You graduated from NEOMed College of Pharmacy, you start residency training. What type of debtload were you looking at then? And had it hit you yet how significant this would be in terms of the repayment journey?
Tim Church: It just kind of felt normal at that point. I mean, everybody else was in a similar position. And I think right when I hit residency and the grace period had ended, I had accumulated debt from undergrad, three years of undergrad, and then also at NEOMed for the PharmD degree. And after all the interest had capitalized, it was pretty close to about $200,000. So like I said, it didn’t really sink in right in the beginning. I was kind of like, OK, everybody else has this debt. This is what everybody faces starting out, you know, no big deal. It will get paid off eventually.

Tim Ulbrich: And so Andria, when you meet Tim as I understand it if I remember this story right, you are still finishing up pharmacy school.

Andria Church: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: Two years of residency still ahead of you. Were you thinking about the weight of the loans at this point in time?

Andria Church: No. I was a third-year pharmacy — well, no. I was in between my second and third year of pharmacy school when I met Tim and he had just finished residency. And so no, I wasn’t thinking about it because kind of like Tim said, everybody had — well, not everybody — but the majority of people had student loans. It was just something that you “had to do” to go to graduate doctoral school. And I remember in undergrad getting this advice. We had some professional financial person come and give a talk at a student organization geared towards students going into the healthcare field. And he had said something that just always stuck with me, which is probably why I didn’t worry about it. He said, “You need to continue to live like a student for the first couple of years after you graduate because you’ll get this massive paycheck and want to live the bigger lifestyle. But you’re going to have these student loans.” So in the back of my mind, it was always the thought, yeah, I’m going to continue to live below my means. So I didn’t feel the weight of it yet, but that’s also probably because I was still a student and I’m like, I just need to focus on graduating, I need to focus on getting a residency. So I wasn’t really thinking about the full weight of what it was going to feel like when I actually had to start paying it off.

Tim Ulbrich: And I know Tim’s good looking, but my gosh. You signed up for this. You said, I’ve got a lot of debt, he’s got a lot of debt, we’re in this together. But I want our listeners to hear, like how did you guys handle this conversation before you got married? And why was that so important to ultimately get to a point where you really treated the debt as ours versus it’s just my debt?

Tim Church: Yeah, it’s a great question, Tim. And I’ll be honest and say, before we got married and when things started clicking for me in terms of wanting to get into a better position and thinking about how I was going to pay off my loans and just making better decisions overall, I thought about this question very hard. And I knew it was going to be very important that if we were going to get married that we — even before we got married, we had to be on the same page with how we were going to look at finances and how we were going to make decisions together to reach those goals together. But the problem was is that in the beginning, I didn’t say it very nicely like that. I wasn’t thinking about oh, let’s look at our goals and dreams together. It was more like, hey, this is what’s going to happen. And are you on board? So I’ll admit that I had the worst approach that you can have with finances and being in a relationship in terms of how to figure out how to be on the same page and know that that’s going to work together because as you mentioned, like it’s a really important part of a relationship. And a lot of marriages and things like that suffer because people cannot come to agreements.

Andria Church: And we were doing — we had that conversation before we were even engaged. We knew that we were on the path, we wanted to get married. And so we started doing a prep for marriage at our church, and there was a financial component. And then we wanted to also take a finance class. And so that very eloquently delivered line from Tim happened before we were even engaged. And it was — it was a large argument that at the time was very frustrating that now we can laugh at because we ended up being on the same page. But yeah, it was just kind of at the time, he got more on board with it first before I did. I, again, I don’t think I had full understanding and I’m thinking, oh yeah, I’ll have to make sacrifices. But I’ll still be able to have some fun and buy things that I want whereas Tim’s like completely gung ho and is ready to just give up everything.

Tim Ulbrich: So Andria, to that point, in all seriousness, we talk — and I give Tim a hard time — but we talk on the show about he’s the all-in kind of person, right? I mean, Tim Church operates at one level, and that’s full speed, you know, whether that’s the awesome work he does with YFP, paying off student loans. And I want to talk about this for a moment because I think, you know, both sides of this, it’s really important to understand how to effectively work with the other person. And what advice would you have, Andria, for those that are listening that are trying to work with this, on this financial piece, whether it’s student loans or another part, and they’re doing it with somebody esle that is all-in, kind of one speed? What advice would you have to make that work from your perspective?

Andria Church: Well I think just reminding the person that it’s about striking a balance. Like it took me some time to realize that we were — we wanted the same goals and we both agreed that being on the same page about our finances was critically important for the success of our future marriage. But I think it’s coming to a middle ground, somewhere in between there, realizing that I needed to get a little bit more on board with his point of view but that he also needed to do the same with mine, that if we were just so gung ho all the way in that direction that we were not going to have any enjoyment or celebrate things throughout the course of those first couple years of our marriage that were worthy of being celebrated, you know, that maybe didn’t — we weren’t going to have a big blowout celebration and go on a big trip, but maybe splurge a little bit on a fancy or something like that versus if we would go all the way to my side, we would not have paid off the loans in five years. So we needed to both reach a middle ground. And it took awhile, a lot of conversations, a lot of really meaningful and long discussions. And over time, honestly just through practicing and just having open communication with each other, we reached that middle ground. I’m way better and more in line with the finances than I was when we were having those initial discussions. And Tim will also be one to admit that he’s glad that I forced us to have some fun and take a moment to pause and really celebrate those small victories that we were having, whether it was getting the student loans off, celebrating our anniversary, or just those things that were really important during those first five years of marriage that we can’t go back and redo. So it was just, honestly just having open communication with each other and expressing frustrations and how we feel about the situation to really ultimately work together and be successful.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I’m so glad, Andria, you know, the word that I took away from there was really balance. And I love how you framed that in the first five years of marriage. I mean, obviously there’s strength in being in the position you are now going forward. But making sure — I mean, that’s no short period of time. It’s not like you guys were paying this off for three months. I mean, five years. And it’s a lot of money. And we’ll talk about more of the numbers and the x’s and o’s. But I think striking a balance. So Tim, as you reflect on this journey with that word balance in mind, you know, when you look back, what are some of the things that helped you get to that point of finding that balanc? And perhaps what would you go back and tell yourself to maybe be more balanced even early on?

Tim Church: Yeah, I think one of the things that we did was after we paid off about $10,000 in student loan debt, we tried to have little celebrations, like Andria said, going out to dinner, maybe even doing like stay at a hotel down in Fort Lauderdale, not too far away, or something like that. And I think the other thing that really helped is one thing that we tried to still do during this time is go and visit family and friends but do it in a very frugal way I’ll say and just be very tactical about how we did that. So I think that was really important, like reflecting back. If I could say what is the one thing that I would not have changed was that and probably should have even considered doing more of that because those are the things that really, we’re never going to regret because we can’t get the time back.

Tim Ulbrich: Love it. Love it. So let’s transition, Andria, to the why for the two of you. We talk about this on the show all the time, the importance of having a why and motivation behind your financial plan. And here, we’re talking about paying off a massive amount of debt and, again, no small feat, five years, lots of difficult conversations. So so important to have a why and a purpose. For you and Tim, what is the why? What’s the motivation behind so aggressively paying off this debtload and getting to the point of being debt-free?

Andria Church: I think the why was just that we had other financial goals and desires that we have for our life together. We wanted to be able to give generously and abundantly to all of those around us and even people that we didn’t know. And in order to do that, we knew that the debt needed to be gone. And it also just was this constant weight that we felt on our shoulders that it was there and felt like we couldn’t really fully enjoy things or take certain luxuries because we would look at it and say, “OK, is this a need to or a want to?” You know, a have to or a want to. And we had to make some of those tough calls that if it wasn’t a have to and it wasn’t a true need, you know, putting that money then towards the debt in the long run, that was going to help us get to those goals quicker. Aside from being able to give abundantly to others, being able to get a house and plan for our future family and retirement, I mean, really long-term vision goals and just also being able to want to provide for our future children when they go off to school and even thinking about grandkids and like just the future generations of the family that we would be creating together. So all of those things was really the long-term vision, even though sometimes on the day-to-day grind, it was hard. You might lose sight of those and think, why are we doing this? Maybe we should just spend a little bit more money. Is it really going to make a big deal in the long run? And I think what really kept us on track was that big why and the fact that we both were on the same page about it and felt the same way and wanted to achieve that goal together.

Tim Church: Even though we had disagreements along the way.

Andria Church: Yes. Not to paint a rose-colored vision of it because yes, there were disagreements.

Tim Ulbrich: And I hear there’s a cat in the future? Is that true? Now that we’re debt-free, is that happening?

Andria Church: Yes, that was the long-term promise that I was going to be allowed to get a cat once we were debt-free, even though despite my best efforts to convince Tim that we needed a cat much earlier on in our marriage. Yeah, that is a goal that is happening.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. Tim, let’s talk x’s and o’s for a minute when it comes to repayment. You know, you’re the student loan expert, and we’re going to talk a little bit in a moment about the book that you have coming out. And we talk all the time on the show about there are so many options in the federal system. You’ve got forgiveness, non-forgiveness, income-driven repayment, standard 10-year repayment. Then you’ve got the whole host of options in the refinance market. And how overwhelming this can be. So when we talk about $400,000 of deb tin five years, what was the repayment strategy? And as you look back, was that the best one?

Tim Church: Yeah. In the very beginning, I didn’t really know what all my options were. And unfortunately, we didn’t — I didn’t have a strong background with my family, friends or people that were very knowledgeable about this area nor did I have a very strong capstone or discussion, really, on student loans and what those options were. So you know, for the longest time in my mind, it was just kind of get rid of them as fast as possible, you know, however you can make it happen. When I look back at this point — and I talk about this in the book obviously with my story — that not considering forgiveness given my situation was a big mistake. I mean, it really costs — there’s a huge opportunity cost to not doing that. It’s great that the debt is paid off and it’s no longer here, but I probably could have been in a better financial position after 10 years than after being in — after the five years that we were married. So there were definitely some things that I reflect on and would say I wish I could have went a little bit of a different way. However, being intentional about trying to get rid of the student loans as soon as possible, you know, we basically utilized, pulled every lever, used every tactic that we could. So obviously the biggest thing is how do you cut back on expenses? How do you minimize those? So one of the key things I think that really helped for us is really looking at those big purchases. So we lived in a one-bedroom apartment for the first three years of our marriage. And you know, we live in south Florida, so it’s definitely not cheap to live here. It’s not as expensive as some other areas, but it’s certainly not cheap. But we made that big sacrifice and definitely got a lot of questions about why we were doing that based on our income. But I think that was actually really huge because we were able to save on those costs. We never — once my car was paid off really early on in the first year of marriage, I think it was right around there, we didn’t really have any car loans, so we had no debt coming from there. So I think we were very fortunate that beyond — really, we just had the student loans that we were working with and didn’t acquire any new debt with credit cards or other things like that. So starting out, those were kind of some of the big tactics. And then I would say the other one along the way was just looking at ways that I could earn additional income. So I did work overtime when it was available through the VA. I took on different special projects that came up. And then I eventually did a moonlighting position for about a year and a half. And that really helped accelerate things because I was just chunking all of that additional money towards the loans, so just making as big of payments as possible. And then I would say — so if you look at those as being kind of the top big strategies, then there’s a couple other things that I think really were in our favor during this time. So what do I mean by that? Well, one of the things is really taking advantage of windfalls. So you don’t know exactly when you’re going to get bonus checks. You don’t know when you’re going to get unexpected money like cashing out a life insurance that you might not necessarily need or stock options you didn’t know that you had that are not in retirement that you don’t really want anymore or for the time being it’s more important to pay off the loans. So all of these things that we never expected were going to be given to us, we really took those and just threw it right at the debt. We never even thought about it as well, how could we spend that money? It was just like, let’s put a massive dent in this student loan — in these student loans. So I think that was key. And then finally, one of the things is obviously refinancing for us. We did that multiple times throughout the five years. And when you look at it, the amount of interest that you pay can be pretty massive. I mean, looking back for awhile, federal student loan interest rates were anywhere in the 6-8% range. And that can really tack onto those payments that you’re making every month. So it makes it hard to really attack the principle. So we were very fortunate that throughout that five years, we continued to find better rates each time that we refinanced. So even though it wasn’t I would say as huge of a lever as some of the other things that we did, it was still really important and really helped us accelerate.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, one of the things, Tim, I love that you said in that was having clarity on where windfalls would come. And you gave some great examples of that. And to me, that goes back to being crystal clear on your goals and having a prioritized list of goals so when that windfall comes, you know exactly what you’re trying to achieve with that and then it feels like you’re hitting the accelerator on that goal, which I think just further provides momentum, obviously. One of the things I want to pull from the book, Tim — and we’re going to talk about this on an upcoming episode in much more detail — so for those that don’t yet know, we’re getting ready to release “The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering PharmD Student Loans: How to confidently choose the best payoff strategy that saves you the most money” written by Tim Church. And in there, you say — and this comes from the introduction — you say, “but once that highly anticipated moment had come and gone,” referring to hitting submit on that last payment, “feelings other than happiness and relief set in, ones that I didn’t necessarily expect or want. I was angry and frustrated. I had some major regrets.” What I love about that as I read through the book is I feel like you’ve evaluated and understand all of the options that are on the table. And obviously here you are on the back end, you’ve got an awesome success story and certainly a bright future ahead. But I think by navigating this, by understanding the ins and outs of all of these repayment options, you’ve been able to package that in a way that is very easy to understand for a topic that is not so easy to understand. And so we’ll talk more about the book in an upcoming episode, but I think you’ve got some great wisdom in there. I’m excited to share that with the YFP community. So Andria, $400,000 of debt in five years. So I want to break this down for a minute. That’s $80,000 per year on average, $6,667 per month on average, $1,538 per week on average, and $219 per day on average. I had to triple check my math when I did that because I saw those numbers and I’m like, oh my gosh. $219 per day on average over five years. That’s really incredible when you think about how accelerated that is and obviously how much of that was ultimately going to principle to be able to minimize the interest that was accruing. So question here is when you’re doing that, even on two pharmacists’ income, it doesn’t matter. That is big sacrifice. We’re talking about $6,667 per month, which essentially for many pharmacists is about the equivalent of a full pharmacist’s salary net income going towards student loan debt. So talk to me about the sacrifices that you had to make to be able to pay off that much debt and obviously free up cash flow each and every month to get there.

Andria Church: Well as Tim mentioned a little bit ago, both of our cars had been paid off. So we did not go out and get new cars. We’ve had — my car is, she’s going to be 11 this year. And Tim’s is a little bit younger but also getting up there in age. So we still have the same cars that we’ve had all this time. So didn’t buy new cars, didn’t go and buy a condo or a house, didn’t go on big lavish trips, even though it’s a goal of ours to travel throughout the United States and internationally. As Tim said, we would take trips to visit family and friends, those critical moments that we didn’t want to look back and miss out on. But taking a dream trip or a trip for extended periods of time, that didn’t happen. For me, buying clothes or accessories or other things that I wanted, that didn’t happen either. And same for Tim, although Tim is less into stuff. I will admit that I am a stuff person. I like things, even though I like experiences too. And you know, also just simple things like cutting back on going out to dinner. We realized so quickly how expensive food is. Not just groceries, but just eating out. And also for me too, I love going out to get coffee. So also having to scale back on that and realizing I can’t be going to buy coffee every day outside of the house. And so something as simple as that, which is just a couple of bucks, right? But that adds up. And Tim would always say something to me that sometimes would resonate and kind of snap me back into reality, you know, death by a thousand cuts. Like I would say, “Oh, it’s only $5. What’s the big deal?” But $5 over multiple periods of time, you know, that could really add up. And so it — it was thinking about the why, it helped stay motivated, helped us stay motivated and helped keep me on track. But there were definitely days where I had the fear of missing out, the FOMO that I would look at our friends or other people who were pharmacists that were friends or other healthcare professionals, people making equal salaries or more to what we were making and just feeling like are we ever going to get there? How old are we going to be when we finally — what I felt like was really start our life? Like are we just going to be in this one bedroom, one bathroom apartment forever? We couldn’t have people stay with us. It was always a challenge and having grown adults sleeping on an air mattress just at a certain point just seemed ridiculous. So it was hard. I’m not going to pretend like even though we were on the same page that making these sacrifices wasn’t a challenge. And we had to constantly remind ourselves to not play the comparison game. And certainly in the day and age of social media, it doesn’t help. And you really have to put yourself in check and just say, “OK, but this is what Tim and I are doing. This is what we’ve decided together that we want to do for our marriage, that we want to do for our future. And in the long run, isn’t that what’s more important than the outfit that I really feel like I need but that I don’t really need?” You know? Is that more important than throwing money towards the student loans. So those were just definitely some challenges that we had to really look at and face and talk about. And we shared that with each other, frustrations like ah, I wish we could go do this or buy this or have this. And OK, yeah, but babe, remember we want to stay on track. And ironically, there were moments where I was the tougher one, reminding Tim and saying, “OK, babe, we can’t be spending that money on that. We need to put it towards the loans.” So yeah, it was tough.

Tim Ulbrich: Such wisdom there, and I hope our listeners are encouraged by that and hear the reality of obviously the excitement and the joy but also the challenges along the way. Now, being in south Florida before and having been able to experience the famous Pub Sub from Publix, I honestly — I don’t think I could control myself to cut that out of my budget. So kudos to you guys if you were able to do that. But for those that haven’t been to south Florida, haven’t been to Publix, it may be worth the trip just to go there and get the Pub Sub from Publix. So Tim Church, let me ask you about kind of handling the debt in the context of other goals. So obviously I’ve got a little bit of an insider view in your story and I know that you were ultimately able to refinance to a really, really low interest rate with First Republic and that offer. And so I think some people may struggle with should I — if I have a really low interest rate, should I be going all in on the debt? Or when I get to a fixed interest like that that’s so low, should I be prioritizing other goals like saving for the future? So talk to us about how you found that balance and ultimately came to that decision.

Tim Church: Yeah, I think early on when we first started paying off the debt, it was kind of like, forget retirement, forget everything else, we’re going all-in. And you know, once we kind of realized how long we were going to be in this, we really didn’t want to go five years without putting any money towards retirement. So one of the things that I think was great along the way is we were still saving for retirement. So we both have matches at work, so we made sure that we contributed enough to get our matches. And then we also did a fully funded Health Savings Account every year that we were able to and that I had it because, you know, really looking at that as another retirement account but also some of the tax benefits. So that worked for us. And I know everyone has a lot of different opinions about how aggressive to kind of be on that timeline. You know, you have a lot of people that will prolong the time to pay off their debt because of the other things. And you know, we wanted to kind of find a balance that worked for us. So we were still doing something but also really after that being as aggressive as we could. You mentioned in that final year, so we didn’t even know about First Republic, and they’re a bank that’s in very specific locations, so New York, south Florida, California and some other areas. But they offer ridiculously low interest rates. So we actually — it was on Andria’s loan, but we were obviously as you talked about were paying it off together, that her loan for a five-year fixed interest rate was down to 1.95%. But what’s crazy is not only that, they will pay you back up to 2% of the interest that you pay if you pay it back within four years, which is like unheard of. So that was actually a struggle. We actually had quite a few discussions about that, like look, we could start saving, getting a down payment on a house, going let’s let these ride for four years, pay it back over four years because the interest rate is so low. I mean, that really was a tough decision. I mean, to go, still go all-in and pay that off. And I think what we ultimately came to the same conclusion is, yes, there are certainly benefits there. But that emotional weight and that anxiety that the loans were still having on us, getting rid of that outweighed any potential mathematical advantage behind it. And obviously sometimes it’s tough for somebody from the outside to look at that, but that was really kind of where we were.

Andria Church: And we just felt like we could see the end of the finish line. And so like what Tim was saying is just knowing OK, yeah, we could hold onto it. But we’re so close. And we’re just like, let’s just get this out of our lives, that that meant more to us than yes, possibly being able to prolong the loan payoff and save for a house, for example. We just, we had put it in our mind that this was something that we were going to do, that we wanted to definitely have it paid off before we had any kids, which of course we’re like, OK, we might not have control over that, but that was like a goal we really wanted. And so it’s like, let’s just meet this goal. We want to get this over with.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think, Tim, you do a nice job of this in the book, you know, talking about obviously the x’s and o’s and strategies but layering on top of that the emotional part, the things we talk about: How do you feel about the debt? And what’s the momentum and the velocity of that momentum worth? And it’s hard to put a dollar amount to that, but it has to be evaluated as one is considering the repayment strategy. So Andria, we have the class of 2020 that is coming out as we publish this episode. And I think they’re coming out in very unique times obviously with what’s going on with COVID-19, some uncertainty around the job market and obviously just the challenges and the times that we’re in, high debt loads, all the variables we know that they’re facing. And certainly we know they’re going to do great things with the opportunities they have as well. What advice would you have — looking back several years when you walked across that stage, what advice would you have for those students that are coming out in the class of 2020 as they get ready to make this transition into new practitioner life?

Andria Church: I would say to definitely consider all of their repayment options, kind of like Tim alluded to that he feels — has regret over not making certain decisions. And I was in the same boat. You know, we both were like, let’s just get it paid off, which there’s nothing wrong with that but just really researching and kind of digging down to figure out what are their options depending on what career that they are stepping into. Is it the private sector? Are they going to be working for the government, etc.? And then two, just also being willing to make some sacrifices that you’re going to step into a job that has a huge salary and it’s going to look very glamorous. And when you get that paycheck because it’s going to be more money than likely you’ve ever made, and the pull, the lifestyle tug is going to be there, the FOMO, you know, maybe peers that didn’t have loans that are living it up a little bit bigger because they’re financially able to. That tug and that temptation is going to be there. But that — just to think about what are your long-term financial goals? Do you want to have this debt hanging around for decades? Or are you willing to make some sacrifices? You know, yes, celebrate this huge victory that you just did, that you earned your PharmD, that you’re getting your first big adult job or maybe it’s your second one if it’s a second career. Celebrate that. There’s nothing wrong with that. Treat yourself a little bit. But be willing to make some sacrifices and not compare yourself. As long as you are on the right track and you feel like you are being a good steward of your money, then that’s what really matters. And if you’re in a relationship with someone that you and the other person are also on the same page with your finances. So to me, it doesn’t matter if you’re — it’s just you or it’s you and another person, that you’re making the best and smartest decisions for your financial future.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. I love that. Tim Church, so we go back to the numbers here. $6,667 per month on average over a five-year period to pay off $400,000 of debt. You hit submit on the last payment, you no longer have to send in on average $6,667 per month. So what’s the game plan going forward? What goals are ahead as you guys look at kind of this life after being debt-free?

Tim Church: Yeah, I mean, like I said, I had some bittersweet thoughts after it kind of happened. But I mean, it definitely just feels like an immense weight is off of us. And it’s just nice that that payment’s not automatically drafted out of the bank account. And so I mean, one of the things is obviously we let loose a little bit. You know, Andria wanted to have a little bit of a shopping spree, so we made that happen. You know, we’ve done some things that we wanted to do that weren’t as intense. So that was really nice. And then really padding the emergency fund was our next big goal that we wanted to do. And then really right after, as we kind of finalized and get that buttoned up is really the next thing is going for a house is one of our big goals.

Tim Ulbrich: Time to be on the offense, right? It’s exciting times.

Tim Church: Yeah. And I think the other thing — and Andria mentioned this a little before — is just the ability to be more generous. I mean, I think that everyone is coming from a different position. But I think that when you have a sound financial plan and you’re in a position to give and help others, you know, that’s something that we truly believe in. And sometimes that may be something that’s planned for and that is continuous, but there’s also going to be opportunities that you may not even know that are going to come up, whether that’s family members, friends or complete strangers you don’t know. And that’s something that we’re looking forward to, to be able to do that.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that. And thank you both so much for taking time to share your story. I know it’s been an inspiration to me and it will be to many in the community, whether those that have achieved that journey or are in the midst of it or students that are listening and thinking about what’s ahead. So proud of you guys for the journey that you’ve had and excited for what lies ahead for your family and those that are going to be positively impacted by your generosity. So thank you so much for taking time to share your story.

Tim Church: Thanks, Tim.

Andria Church: Thank you.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 148: How One Couple Got Started in Real Estate Investing


How One Couple Got Started in Real Estate Investing

Jenny and Myke White join Tim Ulbrich to share their journey into real estate investing. They talk about why they feel like real estate investing is a good fit for them, how they got themselves financially ready to purchase their first property, the good and the bad of owning an investment property and future goals they have for building their portfolio.

About Today’s Guests

Jenny and Myke are both originally from Colorado Springs, CO; they’ve been together for the past 10 years and married for the last 6. Jenny attended Creighton University through the distance program and was awarded her PharmD in 2017. During her time as a student, she interned at Multicare Auburn Medical Center. After graduating, she completed a PGY1 residency at Providence St. Peter Hospital in Olympia, WA and then went on to take a position as a night pharmacist at Multicare Covington Medical Center. Currently, Jenny is working as an assistant professor at William Carey’s School of Pharmacy in Biloxi, MS. She divides her time at Keesler Medical Center, her clinical practice site where she practices as an ambulatory care pharmacist. Myke has been serving in the United States Air Force for the past 12 years. Five and a half years were spent at Luke AFB, AZ, where he worked as a Project Manager. He was the IT contact for both new facility construction projects and renovations, ensuring that customer and contractor support was above reproach, and milestones were met. Five and a half more years were spent at Joint Base Lewis-McChord, WA, where he worked Client Systems, which is usually referred to as the “Geek Squad of the Air Force”. He is currently a Technical Training Instructor at Keesler AFB, where he trains both recent Basic Military Training graduates and re-trainees before they begin their career as Client Systems Technicians.

With Jenny being a new graduate, the thought of paying down school loans was always in the back of her mind. Her night shift schedule really allowed her to start researching ways to create more income besides just working additional hours. During this time, she stumbled across Rich Dad, Poor Dad, which completely changed her mindset on building wealth and developed her new focus of creating passive income through real estate. After sharing her vision with Myke, he also became fascinated in beginning this journey to change their life trajectory in a major way. Shortly after finding this new passion for real estate, they received military orders to Mississippi. This initially came as a huge shock to them, but it truly was a blessing in disguise. Selling their house in Washington’s hot and expensive housing market gave them an opportunity to benefit in Mississippi’s much more affordable housing market. Jenny and Myke hit the ground running to find an investment property in August 2019 and were able to close on their first duplex that December.

They have 3 dogs, enjoy fitness, and love to travel.

Summary

Jenny and Myke recently moved to Mississippi from Washington state. They had planned to stay in Washington for a couple of more years, however, Myke, who joined the Air Force in 2007, received orders to move.

Jenny, a pharmacist, brings the student loans to the table in their relationship and felt responsible to find a way to bring more money in to pay them off. After pharmacy school, Jenny worked a 7 on/7 off schedule which allowed her to work per diem at two other hospitals. She wanted to figure out how to increase their cash flow and create passive income instead of having to work more hours. After readying Rich Dad, Poor Dad she realized that she could become a pharmacist real estate investor.

The couple works with Tim Baker, one of YFP’s CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNERS™, and he suggested that she take the PSLF route in paying off her loans after hearing their financial goals. Jenny and Myke started focusing on saving money for a down payment on a real estate investment property with the extra money they had each month. They were also able to use the capital gains from selling their house in Washington to help with purchase their first property.

Myke shares that they dove into real estate investing because they can positively help other people while bringing in cash each month. They also want to be good landlords and take care of others. They closed on their first duplex in December 2019 and currently have one side rented. In this episode, they share what they’ve learned in the real estate investment process so far and what their future plans are.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. I’m excited to have on the show this week Jenny and Myke White to talk about their journey with real estate investing. Now, we have heard loud and clear from the YFP community that you want to hear more stories from those in the beginning stages of real estate investing. And this episode is intended to do just that, to share their journey into real estate investing, how they got themselves financially ready to go, what types of investing they’re doing, how it is going, lessons learned, and where they’re going from here. So Jenny and Myke, welcome to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast.

Jenny White: Yeah, thanks for having us, Tim.

Myke White: Tim, it’s a pleasure.

Tim Ulbrich: Well let’s start with some introductions. Jenny, you first. And then Myke. Talk to us a little bit about your background, your careers and the work that you’re doing right now.

Jenny White: OK, so my name’s Jenny White, and I’m the pharmacist in this marriage. And so we actually met Tim Ulbrich through the other Tim, who’s been our financial advisor for the past year. I was starting my pharmacy career in Washington state, where I worked as an intern. I was actually part of Creighton’s distance program. And so once I graduated, I did my PGY1 residency at Providence St. Peter and then went on to work for about a year with multicare as an overnight pharmacist, so working in the ED and primarily MedSurg. And then we kind of had a change of plans, so we were in Washington for about six years during my whole time being a pharmacy student and then my pharmacy career. And then Myke, who will introduce himself here shortly, is in the Air Force, and we got orders to Mississippi, which changed things dramatically for us. ANd so now I’m actually an assistant professor at William Carey University. And so I split my time being a faculty member for the pharmacy school and then working at Keesler Air Force Base as an ambulatory care pharmacist.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Thank you. Myke, go ahead.

Myke White: So my name is Myke White, I like Jenny said am in the Air Force. I joined in 2007. I started out in Arizona as a IT project manager. So I handled a lot of the high-dollar initiatives throughout the installation, whether it was new constructions or renovations, anything that needed communications, meaning network capability, computer servers. We were all up in it. So I was there for almost six years, made our way to Washington where I was a client systems technician, so I mainly focused on computer and end user devices. And I liked it. We were there for almost six years, and honestly, our plan was to stay for probably a couple more years, get Jenny established and maybe even try to get overseas if we could. And then actually came back from holiday exodus in 2018, and I realized that we got orders. And of course when you look at your orders, it just says that you’re notified or you were selected for orders. It doesn’t exactly tell you where you’re going. So I was excited because on my preference list, I had nothing but overseas. So I’m like yes, we’re going to get that opportunity to get overseas. And I checked, and I saw that we’re going to Keesler. And of course, I had to break the news to Jenny. And she was obviously not happy. But at the end of the day, we had to deal with what we were given. So now we’re here. And it’s actually not as bad as I ever would have thought. You know, it’s opened up quite a bit of opportunities for us. And hopefully they continue as long as we’re here.

Tim Ulbrich: I think the Mississippi folk listening will be glad to hear you say it’s not as bad as you had thought. And what a change, I mean, Pacific Northwest to Mississippi. We talked about before we hit record, you know, home being Colorado. So lots of transition for sure. But I’m excited, I know one of the goals that you all have going forward is sort of the flexibility and the freedom with travel and doing things that you love, especially as time in the military eventually wraps up and having more options, which is I think where real investing in the financial plan fits in so well. So Myke, I want to start with really a broad question about your financial plan as a couple and how real estate investing fits in. And the reason I want to start here is that I see many pharmacists, especially new practitioners, really struggling to get started with real estate investing. One, they want to do it but they don’t know how to get started because, you know, of course they’re balancing six figures of student loan debt, perhaps the need to build up reserves for a rainy day fund, getting rid of credit card debt, trying to prioritize other goals such as investing, home buying, wedding, starting a family, the list goes on and on, right? So tell us a little bit about for the two of you — and obviously in your work with Tim Baker as well I’m sure this has been part of the discussion — how has real estate investing been able to come up and bubble up as a priority among all the other things that you’re trying to work on?

Myke White: So starting from the beginning, honestly, I had not necessarily an interest but I just didn’t know better when it came to real estate just because you know, you have that typical mindset of people where there’s a lot of moving parts, there’s a lot of money involved, there’s a lot of things that people don’t know so they kind of just put it off, that’s not for me type thing. And of course once Jenny was introduced to YFP and in the midst of all of that, Bigger Pockets and I mean, her entrepreneurial spirit anyway, she kind of found out about everything. And then she kind of sold it to me. So of course I was a little bit apprehensive at first. I was like, eh, I don’t think so. But then after I started reading a few things, looking at a few different articles and of course read “Rich Dad, Poor Dad,” I think that’s when my whole mindset shifted. And I was like, OK, maybe we can do something different, we can stop this 9-5 mindset and think outside the box and figure out ways that our money can work for us and benefit us in the long run. So I think once we started that, we kind of started to zero in on our different priorities and how real estate can feed that. And also leaving Washington, we of course sold our house. And we ended up making quite a bit of capital, extra capital, in order for us to start to kick things off once we got to Mississippi. So we’re able to pay down quite a bit of our debt, we’re able to establish our nest egg or our real estate venture. So I think once we got to that point and once we got settled in Mississippi, we’re kind of able to set our priorities and get that going. But as far as right now, our plan is again to — so I retire in about eight years. So for us to kind of get established now, get smart on everything, establish our connects and different things and get that going. We of course got our first property. Obviously our goal is to get at least 1-2 properties at minimum a year until we get to the point where the cash flow is supplementing at least one of our salaries so we don’t have to worry about working.

Tim Ulbrich: So Jenny, you must have done an awesome job selling him well. I mean, hearing Myke go from “I’m unsure of this” to “We’re going to be getting at least 1-2 properties a year,” that gets me fired up. And isn’t it amazing — I mean, “Rich Dad, Poor Dad” had that same effect on me. And I recommend, I feel like it should be required reading throughout multiple times. It’s not one of those things you read once either. I feel like you pick up something new each time. But it’s a mindset book. It just makes you think differently about money, especially if something like real estate investing, small business, wasn’t a part of how you grew up. Jenny, talk to us for a moment about student loans because I’m guessing many people are listening saying, “My gosh. Like I would love to get started with real estate investing.” But you know, we know the average indebtedness is about $170,000 across the country for today’s graduates. So for you all, talk to us about the student loan position and then your repayment strategy and how that has played into allowing you to be able to prioritize real estate investing while you’re also facing student loan debt.

Jenny White: Yeah. So for us, student loan debt is definitely something that I think triggered this looking out for other options. So obviously when I went to school, pharmacy was my passion. Like I absolutely love it. I love what I do, I love hospital, I love ambulatory care, I love all realms of it. But once I was working as an overnight pharmacist, I’m like, yes, I finally made it. I’ve got that consistent salary, I’m making money. And we were paying down some of the debt that we had accumulated. And mind you, so Myke, he doesn’t bring this debt to the table. Like this is strictly mine. I know there’s a lot of people that are two pharmacists or other debt. Like this is all mine. So in my mind, I was almost thinking like, I have to get rid of this. So I kept looking at other things. I looked at side hustles and I was trying to figure out how we could do — how we could continue to pay it off because my first goal was I wanted to try to pay off all of the student debt because I was like, let’s just get this out of our way. Like I don’t want to deal with this anymore. But then after I’d talked to Tim and I was like, OK, I did sign up for PSLF because I was like, this is kind of my backup, if like in a couple years I realize like I’m not getting this paid down quickly enough then I could always fall back on PSLF and draw back on the payments and try to decrease them. The other thing that I noticed too was that like when I was working, I had the 7-on, 7-off working night shift, which was amazing. But it also gave me the opportunity to work per diem. And so I was working per diem at two hospitals. And then I was like looking at my paycheck, and I was just like holy cow, like so much of my money is getting taken away for taxes. And so I was like, there has to be something else, which is when I found “Rich Dad, Poor Dad,” which I recommend that book to every single person. It’s $5 on Amazon. There is like no reason, especially now in the quarantine, that you can’t read it because that completely shifted it where I was like, this is right, they’re taking all of my hard-earned money for taxes and using it for whatever they use taxes for. But like how can I hold onto more of my money? And then that’s where it really shifted to thinking about cash flow, passive income, and then we kind of shifted focus on like instead of paying down all the debt, let’s focus on saving up as much as we can to get down payments for houses.

Tim Ulbrich: I love it. And I think that strategy of PSLF here is really an important part because as our listeners know well, now if you’re pursuing PSLF, which right now doesn’t get sweeter than it is, right? We’ve got a bonus time period here of $0 PSLF-qualifying payments because of the CARES Act. But the PSLF strategy, you know, if that’s what you’re in is minimize payments, maximize forgiveness. And here, that allows additional cash flow to be freed up to be able to focus on things like real estate investing. And I think it’s a good reminder of the interconnectedness of all the parts of a financial plan and how someone like a coach can really help you balance those out and think about them where it’s often easy just to get siloed in the one part of the financial plan. So Jenny, talk to us a little bit about the month-to-month rhythm for you guys. I know if you’re working with Tim Baker, it likely means he’s talked about a budget and the spending plan and obviously I would assume that’s a key part here based on the goals that you have. What does this look like month-to-month and week-to-week for you and Myke in terms of how you’re able to account for income and expenses and ensure you’re able to fund and prioritize the goals that you guys have?

Jenny White: Yeah, so for us, Tim Baker has been a huge resource to us, and we’ve definitely learned a lot from him and kind of managing our finances as well as Tom, who is the budget guy for Tim. And so we’ve been working with him. So we really had to kind of focus in our spending. And we actually run a budget now, which is something that we didn’t really do before and we kind of just would pay our bills but we really wouldn’t look at our spending. And now when we do that, we’re like, holy cow, we spent this much money going out to eat, we spent this much money on groceries. And so it really opened our eyes, and so we try to make sure that we’re cognizant of that. So that was kind of a big thing. But even for kind of getting in the ball rolling for the real estate thing, a lot of it was just learning. And Myke and I are still doing that. We have tons of books from Bigger Pockets that we’re reading, we listen to podcasts, and we also — the thing with Bigger Pockets is that they have so many great resources. So one thing that a lot of people don’t realize too is they think like, I can’t get started in real estate because I don’t know everything. But start learning now so that you can get the ball rolling so that when you’re ready, then you’re good to go. So like we started in January of 2019. This is when I really started. And then you know, early in the year, then Myke really got involved. And so we were listening to all the podcasts, reading all the books. But they have a calculator on Bigger Pockets that you can use to like really dial in like your properties. But you have to practice it to be able to like see what a good deal is versus what isn’t a good deal. And so from the time that we started doing that, we were practicing probably from like March ‘til May-June timeframe before we got there so that when we actually got to Mississippi, we were ready to roll because we could actually pull in those numbers, we knew what we were looking for, we knew what made sense, and we weren’t trying to scramble and wonder if this was a good deal.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that. And I love your passion for learning because I think what happens here, what my wife and I have found is when you’re listening to podcasts, when you’re reading books, when you’re analyzing deals, running calculators, you can’t stop thinking about it, right? And then you kind of start talking about it more. And then you find yourself driving down the street and you’re like, ooh, I wonder if that would be a good property? Does that beat the 1% Rule?

Jenny White: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: And it’s top of mind. And then it gets cemented as a priority, and I think it starts to build that confidence so that as Bigger Pockets talks about all the time, great resource, that first deal is the hardest deal. You’ve got to get over the hump.

Jenny White: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And you’re never going to feel fully confident, fully ready. You’re going to make mistakes. We’ll talk about some of those along the way. And that’s OK. But you’ve got to get started. In that, of course, making sure you’re doing so in a way that fits in with the rest of your financial goals. So Myke, before we talk about the first property, why real estate investing? You know, I know our listeners are probably thinking about, OK, I could be maxing out 401k’s and 403b’s and HSAs and Roth IRAs, I could invest in a brokerage account. What is it specifically about real estate investing that intrigues you maybe equally or even more so than other areas and options for investing?

Myke White: For real estate, for us, obviously the bonus is money, is that cash flow. But it’s also helping people. And a lot of people don’t necessarily always think about that. They think, OK, this guy is huge into real estate. He’s in it all for the money. But a lot of money don’t realize that you’re helping people’s situation. And I feel like we’re seeing that firsthand with the property that we currently have. There is a tenant in there that, I mean, doesn’t necessarily have the best situation. But I feel like, you know, us being her landlords, we’re kind of seeing our focus shift from OK, it’s not about the money, it’s about making sure that they’re good. So if they’re good, that means that you’re good. So that’s kind of how we see it. Obviously like the money’s nice. That leads to other things. But at the end of the day, you’re helping those people. So I think that’s something that you don’t necessarily see in a lot of other forms of investment.

Jenny White: And I think too is sometimes landlords kind of can get a bad rap, and that’s not something that we’re striving for. You know, we actually want to provide a property. And we’ve had a lot of things that have already popped up that the property manager prior to us taking over this property didn’t take care of, but we’re taking care of it because it’s the right thing to do. And overall, she’s a great tenant. And we want to keep her long-term. And so by Myke saying like, you know, being good landlords and helping them out and even with like COVID-19 right now, making adjustments to payments, doing what we can. I think that’s going to help us keep her long-term, which is what we want because that helps with cash flow too. Turnover can get you quite a bit if you’re not careful.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m so glad you said that. You know, I’ve learned firsthand with the property my wife and I recently purchased, the cost of vacancy or turnover that leads to vacancy or obviously repairs that need to be done then because of damages or other things. But in tandem, it’s not just the numbers. Obviously you’re in a position to help, and I love that heart and passion to do that, especially during a difficult time like this. So Jenny, walk us through the first property. A duplex, tell us about it, where it is, what it looked like, kind of general numbers, and why the duplex is where you decided to start versus a single family home or even doing something like a house hack. What was the strategy and thinking there?

Jenny White: Yeah, so when we got to Mississippi, one, we were coming from Washington state where single family homes are easily not like even great, but they’re between $200,000-300,000 for like bare minimum. We came to Mississippi and we’re looking at like $60,000-100,000. We’re like, holy cow. So then when we started looking at properties, duplexes were popping up, which like in Washington are probably close to $500,000 where here, you can get them for under $200,000. And we were just like, we can’t believe this. So we started looking at both because to us, it was important just to make sure that the numbers made sense. And so we looked at both, and we probably looked at a good 10-15 properties, ran numbers on close to 50-60. And actually, our first deal fell through. So we had put down — or we had gone under contract for an initial duplex, which had two tenants in it. And we were planning on keeping them. Then some issues happened with the electrical boxes being in inappropriate places, so they were going to be expensive fixes for us. And then once we continued down the process, our appraisal came back down low, which would have been great for us, but the seller wasn’t willing to go down. And so we ended up losing out on that duplex because we couldn’t come to an agreement on terms and all that. And so at that point, that was like September timeframe and Myke and I were pretty bummed out because we were literally a couple days away from closing before it fell through. And so it had been over a month of working, getting inspections done. So we were really bummed. So we started going back to the drawing board and were looking at more properties when I actually went with our realtor — and we had a great realtor who was very investor-friendly. So she went with us, you know, even in the evenings, anytime she was like available to go with us. And so Myke actually didn’t even see the property until we actually had purchased it because I went with the realtor and it was listed for $125,000 for a duplex there was two tenants in. On the unit side A, it has some repairs that are needed but nothing bad. Unit B was a Section 8 tenant that had been there for about eight years, had really demolished the place. Like I mean, you walked in there and you could see like the smoke. It was just like everywhere. Everything was caked in dirt, it was pretty run down. And so we knew — I knew that it was going to need a lot of fixing up. So I told Myke, I was like, well let’s keep looking. We’ll keep an eye on that. It’s listed too high. We kept looking and I just kind of got like a gut feeling, and I was like, let’s just take a chance. And like our realtor had let us know that their realtor had kind of mentioned that the person who was selling was an older guy. He was just trying to get rid of the property. So then I went to look at the purchase information, I saw that he had purchased it back in 2009, paid $60,000 for it. So I was like, he’s got his money in and he’s made tons of money already. So I was like, let’s just try lowballing. I was like, let’s just take a chance, we’ll see what happens. They had said they were already evicting Unit B and they were going to get rid of her. So I was like, OK, if we can make that part of the contract, then that would be great. So it was listed for $125,000, and I said, “Let’s offer $60,000.” And so most people would think that I was crazy, which it was a little bit. My realtor even — our realtor even said, “Either they’re going to ignore you. Or they might come back with an offer.” She’s like, “That’s pretty low.” She’s like, “I don’t know what’s going to happen.” I said, “That’s fine.” I was like $60,000, we’ll pay closing costs, let’s see what happens. So it took — what? — about like a day and they came back and they said, “We’ll sell it for $85,000.” Yeah. So it was huge for us. Their realtor was actually really smart because at the same time, she said, “We’ll take $85,000, but we’re dropping the price to $92,000 on the MLS.” So that day, they got multiple offers from it dropping that much. But we had said, “We’re like, we’ll take it for $85,000. We’ll go.”

Tim Ulbrich: I love that. And you know, speaking of the cost difference from Pacific Northwest to Mississippi, there you go. If anybody’s hearing that, they’re probably like, “What number? Say that again. How much for a duplex?” But you know, when you talk about the 1% Rule as just a general example, when you’re talking about two units for $85,000, the math is pretty quick. I don’t really have the details, but I know just with those numbers it’s probably a good deal based on that. So you know, area matters. And I think this is important for our listeners to hear because some people might be in an area where they say, “The numbers don’t work. I live in Seattle. I live in Columbus. I live in wherever.” And so being open to out-of-state, out-of-area investing I think is really important. Actually, Bigger Pockets has a book out specifically on long distance real estate investing, which is a great read. It’s something I’ve done. And as I understand it, you all are thinking about bringing in other people that are out-of-area but see your market as an opportunity, correct?

Jenny White: Yeah. That’s something that we want to do.

Myke White: Yeah, so even when we were in Washington, obviously we wanted to try to get the ball rolling. But there would have been no way. It would have been out of our price range. So of course it’s comfortable. It’s convenient to stay in your own personal market. But sometimes you might need to consider venturing into other areas just to see what the environment is there. If you know people that invest in that particular market, you know, ask them how the climate’s been for maybe the past few months or couple years, even, and kind of go at it that way because yeah. Like I said, coming here has opened up a lot of doors and opportunities and as much as we really wanted to get into real estate, it wouldn’t have happened — it wouldn’t have happened at least as quick if we weren’t here.

Jenny White: And so we have people who are from Washington and Colorado who are interested. And I mean, getting into a partnership is kind of nerve-wracking as is. But that’s why we’ve talked to people that we knew we were interested, people that we trust, and we’re in the process of kind of like working out what those contracts would look like because basically, Myke and I are tapped on capital because we put our down payment down, we made the repairs to the other side, so it might take us a little while to pull our capital back out through the BRRRR method or just save up enough money to make that happen. And so we’ve talked to a couple people and said, you know, “You bring the funding for the down payment. We own the place 50-50 and there’s different ways to work it out with your financing. But then we can property — we’ll be the property managers for it.” And that also is a big thing that people don’t want to do, they don’t want to deal with the headache of being a landlord. And so we’re like, OK, if it’s in our area, we keep our duplexes within a certain radius for us to be able to get to, we manage that portion of it and then you get your payment every month, you get your cash flow, we both are building equity, we have this and we can figure out what we do with it down the line. But it’s an opportunity for people to get involved in real estate. And again, some people don’t want to learn the process either. So that’s another thing is we’re invested in learning in this process and managing it and being hands-on. So we’ll gladly work with people if they want to give us the money to do it.

Myke White: Yeah, so prime example, I mean, my dad came down here to visit about a month ago. And he had of course known that we were doing our thing with our duplex. And so of course, what better way to kind of tell him what we’re dealing with than actually show him the duplex, show him or at least explain to him the process so we could get there, the money involved. And really, we gave him like the short and simple version to kind of be like, oh, that sounds pretty interesting. That sounds like something I would maybe want to get involved with. So obviously, you know, you hear a lot of times when it comes to these type of things, don’t involve family, you don’t want to mess up the dynamic. And I was very reluctant, even though Jenny asked me quite a few times, “Just ask your family. Ask your mom and dad if they want to throw some capital at us.” And I’m like, no because if the crap hits the fan and something happens, I don’t want to be looked at or affect our relationship. But the way that we kind of conveyed it to my dad, he was excited about it, he told my mom. He was like, “Look, we want to make this happen. So if there’s any properties that you see come across your desk, let us know. And we’ll see if we want to provide a little bit of capital. So that’s like the best case scenario, honestly. And I know that whatever we give them, they know that we already did our due diligence and running the numbers and making sure it works for us before pulling the trigger.

Tim Ulbrich: I love the creativity there because you know — and I think as you all are discovering, like I think it certainly can be tricky with family and friends. But with really good agreements in place and good conversations and just very honest conversations about hey, there’s risk and we need to all understand what worst case scenario is. And I’ve done some investing with somebody else where I think they’ve done a really, really good job of that to say, “Hey, I care enough about you that I want you to fully understand the risk and be transparent because this relationship is first. So as long as we’re all on the same page about the risks as well as the opportunities, then we can clearly communicate that and document it.” I think that that’s reasonable. So I love the creativity because what I hear you saying is that the rate-limiting step for you guys growing your portfolio at 1-2 units a year — and I’m guessing if we talked a year from now that number might be 2-4, 3-5, whatever — is that you know, obviously you’ve got to have the capital. And I think it’s important to you all that you aren’t being overleveraged and that you can have equity in these homes. So it just takes time to build up a down payment. I mean, even when you were talking about an $85,000 property, if you’re putting a significant chunk down to get good financing and to make sure you’re not overleveraged, it just takes time to save to do that. But if you guys can put in sweat equity and bring other people in that maybe have the capital interest and don’t want to put in the sweat equity, you can essentially have the equity in the property without necessarily needing as much of the capital. And I love that creativity for you guys moving forward. So that makes a whole lot of sense. So Myke, tell me a little bit about the other side of this. You know, I think sometimes we talk about real estate investing and we talk about it like it’s roses, rainbows and cupcakes. But there’s another side of it as well, right? And that’s the — we all have stories of this didn’t go as planned or I thought this was going to happen or oh my gosh, I didn’t realize this. Talk to us a little bit about with this property what those moments were for you guys.

Myke White: Yes. Of course, like Jenny said, in regards to our duplex, I did not see the property until we had already got it. And so it was already 10 times better than it looked when she went there for the initial walkthrough because all the furniture was gone, of course the tenants were gone, the carpet was actually ripped up already.

Jenny White: Thank goodness because it was gross.

Myke White: There was a lot of that smoke smell. So I just walked in and — of course we had seen a bunch of other properties along the way that were not that great. And so I was like, OK, I feel like I’ve seen it all at this point. But I was sorely mistaken. So I walked in, yeah, it was really bad. And I was like, we’ve got a lot of work ahead. And luckily, we do have, you know, that support system and we do have our realtor that knows quite a few people that can do the handiwork. But we also have friends that can assist when needed. So we’re like, OK, maybe we can knock this out and do it on our own. But yeah, it was — once we got into it, we realized how much work it was. So we first started out by trying to get rid of that smoke smell because it was everywhere. And we knew a lot of it was absorbed into the walls. So we had done a little bit of research and we had found a solution that we got from Home Depot to literally just scrub the walls.

Jenny White: And we had white towels that were coming back black and brown and like we’ve been trying to document our journey too so we have like the videos on my Instagram and I post them to my Facebook just so people can see like what we’ve been doing.

Myke White: Yeah, so we were able to get some small stuff done. But literally, it was that first day — matter of fact, it was probably that first hour of that first day that we realized, OK, we might need to get some — we might need backup. So we called it a day and we looked into different contractors that could do at least a little bit of work for us. And so we had decided on one. They were able to get in pretty quickly and they replaced the flooring, they painted the walls and did a few annoying things. So right now as it sits, the duplex is almost OK. But I feel like anything else that needs to be done, we can do. But that’s just kind of the expectation. You’re never typically going to find a property that’s ready to go. And you know, it’s expected that you’re going to have to put a little bit of work in. You’re not always going to have the luxury of having that support system or having that realtor that just happens to know the handyman or the AC guy or the electrician. So sometimes it’s what needs to happen in order for you to make some progression.

Jenny White: But we learned too along the way that a lot of things, when we decided we were first going to do it, we’re like this is great because our tenant, the one that stayed, her rent covers our entire mortgage. So we’re like, OK, we can take a little bit of time with this, which is why we wanted to do it. Then we realized we both work full-time jobs, getting this done on the weekends and like evenings, it was taking up too much time. So realistically, with us delaying the nice rent money that we’re losing by not having a tenant in there, so we were like, we need to just get this fixed up, which I mean, we’ve had delays and life happens and things happen, so it’s still going. But that was again, when we purchased our original — when we made the decision to purchase this property, knowing that her rent covered our mortgage, it’s not anything that we’re losing money on, which is very good in our scenario. But we were like, we’re going to have this done by February. It didn’t get done by February. Then in February, like great, we’re going to get this done, then we had a delay on our appliances. We were still having trouble with the smoke smell, so we had to have the AC guy come in to do more repairs. And so now, it’s about ready and now COVID-19’s going on. And so we’ll see how long it takes us to get into — get a renter into that property.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Jenny White: But that’s again, when you buy, buy smart and don’t overleverage yourself because, you know, we’re still in an OK position right now. So we’re just kind of biding our time.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s a good reminder that what’s coming to me as you were talking of especially on the first property, buy smart, don’t overleverage. You know, when I heard you say one half of the total rent of the duplex covered your payment, that gives you margin right out of the gates, right? So if timing goes on, if an expense comes up you’re not aware of or doing this for the first time, we didn’t realize this or this, you’ve already got options and you have a little bit of wiggle room. So and I love — just kind of bringing this all full circle — I love as we think about the future of investing for you guys and why you’re doing this, connecting this all the way back to having some flexibility and options, diversifying your income, generating additional revenue streams so you guys can pursue travel and other passions and hobbies that you guys have. I also hear kind of a desire and a heart for giving and doing other things that you have options to do. So what a cool story, and I’m so grateful that you both took the time to come on the show to share this. And I think it’s going to help many people that are thinking about hey, I’d love to do this but I just don’t know where to get started. So I appreciate both of you taking the time to come onto the podcast this week.
Jenny White: Yeah, thanks for having us.

Myke White: Thanks for the opportunity.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 147: How One Pharmacist is Turning Tragedy Into Triumph


How One Pharmacist is Turning Tragedy Into Triumph

Phillip Beach, Director of Pharmacy at Arkansas Continued Care, talks about his career journey, his path toward financial independence, and the start of the Harper Faith Foundation, a 501(c)3 non-profit that was founded in memory of his daughter Harper Faith Beach who was born with hypoplastic left heart syndrome (HLHS).

Summary

In this episode, Phillip shares about his career path, the why behind his and his wife’s FIRE journey, and the start of the Harper Faith Foundation in memory of his daughter.

Phillip graduated in 2017 from Harding University College of Pharmacy and began working at NEA Baptist the following week with a 7 on/7 off night shift for about two years. Through networking on LinkedIn, Phillip was able to take a PRN position which led to his current full-time Director of Pharmacy position at Arkansas Continued Care.

Unfortunately, on September 11, 2018, his life forever changed. His daughter, Harper Faith, passed away due to hypoplastic left heart syndrome (HLHS), a congenital heart disease she had been battling with for four months. Phillip shares how he and his wife grieved, how his outlook on life has altered and what their focus is on financially because of their tragic loss.

Philip and his wife wanted to help other heart families and formed the Harper Faith Foundation. The foundation supports others by promoting research, giving inpatient gift bags full of toiletries and other necessities to make long-term hospital stays a bit easier, and offers a yearly college scholarship to a high school senior with a congenital heart defect.

Phillip shares that he and his wife are moving to a FIRE approach with their finances and life because they want to have more time and freedom to do what they want.

More About Harper Faith Foundation

About Harper Faith Foundation: In January of 2019, Phillip and his wife, Tori, founded the 501c3 nonprofit organization “Harper Faith Foundation” in memory of their daughter, Harper Faith Beach, who was born with hypoplastic left heart syndrome (HLHS). Their mission is to spread awareness for congenital heart defects and to help out families who are battling HLHS. They are dedicated to turning tragedy into triumph.

HFF helps heart families by doing the following:

1) Yearly college scholarship to a congenital heart disease survivor

2) Donating funds (Ronald Mcdonald house, CVICU @Arkansas Childrens Hospital, directly to those in need)

3) Giving gift bags to those currently staying in the CVICU (gift bags include the following: children’s books, newborn socks, newborn side snap onesies, pacifier, newborn stuffed animal, toiletries for both mom and dad – shampoo, conditioner, bodywash, face wipes, toothbrush and toothpaste, lotion. The bags also contain a water bottle, kleenex, individual Tide laundry packs, notebook, pen, and a binder to help organize medical documents and information.

4) Supporting research at Mayo Clinic – participation in 2 clinical studies (studying DNA, cord blood stem cell injection into the heart during surgery).

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. It’s an honor to have joining me Phillip Beach, a recent graduate of Harding University College of Pharmacy and Director of Pharmacy at Arkansas Continued Care. On today’s episode, we’re going to talk about really an unimaginable journey that Phillip and his wife had had over the past couple years with the loss of their daughter Harper Faith at a very, very young age to a congenital heart condition. And we’re going to talk, yeah, we’ll talk a little bit about Phillip’s career journey, a little bit about their financial journey, but we’re going to talk most about that journey of loss, that journey of grief. What were the strategies that allowed them to come together to get through that difficult time? And we’re also going to talk about what they are doing going forward with the starting of the Harper Faith Foundation, a 501(c) not-for-profit organization that’s designed to help families and research that is related to the condition that took their daughter at such a young age. So Phillip, thank you so much for taking time to join me on this week’s episode. And welcome to the show.

Phillip Beach: Thanks, Tim. I’m very excited to be here and share our story. So thank you for having me on.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s start our conversation with your journey into pharmacy school and the current work that you’re doing.

Phillip Beach: So I got started in pharmacy 2017. I graduated and I took a 7-on, 7-off night shift position at NEA Baptist in northeast Arkansas. And so I did night shift for a little under two years, and that was a great time. Got to work with a good friend of mine and it was a huge learning experience. So I learned a ton, got my feet wet in that role and really learned what hospital setting was all about as a pharmacist straight out of school. Currently, I am Director of Pharmacy at Arkansas Continued Care Hospital. We’re considered a long-term acute care. We’re a 44-bed facility, and I am the full-time pharmacist. We have one full-time technician with me as well. Census is typically 20-25, somewhere in that area. So we stay busy. We just implemented Omnicells about a year ago, so we’ve been getting that process down and really enjoying that over doing cart fill, which is a nice change. And as you can imagine, it is a smaller place, so I get to wear a bunch of different hats and it keeps me constantly learning. And there’s just so much to do and so much to learn. It’s been great. And the community is small, so I’m getting to know the nurses and the leadership and the physicians, everyone, way more than I did at a larger hospital.

Tim Ulbrich: So as we’re recording, we’re in the middle of the COVID-19 pandemic, so thank you to you and your team that are on the frontlines of this and going to work each and every day. And it sounds like as we talked about before we hit record, you all haven’t been as impacted yet, at least, right, by the pandemic?

Phillip Beach: Yes, sir. So we’re — the models currently look like around towards the end of this month, around the 26 is what we’re expecting. So we’re preparing for that, doing a lot of education on PPE donning and doffing, obviously trying to get any supplies we can get and also doing emergency preparedness with the other hospitals in this region, kind of combined forces and see how many ventilators we have and what we can do when it does come.

Tim Ulbrich: So Phillip, when I think about a leadership role at a smaller institution like you’re at — and as you mentioned, you wear lots of different hats — I think about, you know, when you’re in that size of an organization, obviously a time like this, you’re thinking about emergency preparedness types of things. But even just in not a time like this, normal operations, you’re probably wearing a financial hat, a human resource hat, operations hat. And how does one prepare themself for that? Or maybe a better question is how do you get an opportunity like that, you know, right out of school, graduating in 2017, without advanced residency training or additional academic degrees?

Phillip Beach: Well, I’ve had a lot of great mentors. So his name was Byron at my previous job, he was a really good boss. So I got to learn and watch him while I was on night shift for almost two years. And then my current boss, Charlie, has been fantastic in helping mentor me into this role and leading me on the path as a director. And then like I said, the leadership team at our hospital as well, getting to be involved and watching them and learning from people that have been here longer than me and know what they’re doing and really learning leadership styles. It’s been very helpful to watch them. But the amount of hats that you wear, really, it just comes with time doing it. So the longer that you’re in it, the more you learn. And you know, literally I am learning stuff every day and there’s just so much to improve upon constantly so that I feel like my work will never end, which is a good thing. It keeps me having new goals constantly. There’s always something I can work on, antibiotic stewardship or policies and procedures or nailing down our therapeutic interchanges, there’s just so much I can do on a daily basis that I enjoy.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and as you know, once you land a position like that, as time goes on in your career, the lack of having a residency training or additional degree is going to matter less and less. And I want our students listening to hear, you know, what I heard is really two years of a willingness to learn, night shift, I’m not sure many people are willing to do night shift for two years. I definitely hear a willingness and a desire to learn, hard work, seeking mentorship, so I think all of those things are incredibly important. So thank you for sharing.

Phillip Beach: Yeah, I’d also want to — I forgot to mention networking was huge. I actually found this position by networking on LinkedIn. And I reached out to the current Director of Pharmacy who had posted like a PRN shift work, and I was just looking for additional income. So at the time when I was 7-on, 7-off, you know, I had those seven days free. I was like, hey, I want a couple days extra work. So I reached out to her on LinkedIn, and that’s how the whole ball got rolling. And so I worked PRN filling in for her for a little over a year, about 14 months, and you know, when she left the job, it opened up to me and she recommended me for the position. So it’s crazy that networking and LinkedIn, how far that can go in today’s age. So I can’t emphasize that enough too for new grads.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, absolutely. And ironically, it’s a reminder to me that this interview came to be because of LinkedIn. So we had connected a while back when you were in pharmacy school, you helped us do some editing for the book “Seven Figure Pharmacist.” I think you might have been a P2, P3. And then I had seen you post a few months ago on LinkedIn some updates and work that you’re doing with the Harper Faith Foundation, and I was like, “Ah, that’s right! Phillip helped us with the book.” I think I had heard from you a couple other times via email and other things. So I think it’s just a good reminder of the power of networking and staying in touch with folks over a period of time. So Phillip, you graduate from pharmacy school in 2017, obviously your career is taking off at a very young age. And on September 11, 2018, life changes really forever. Tell us more.

Phillip Beach: So Harper was born May 21, 2018. She was born with half a heart, Hypoplastic Left Heart Syndrome. It’s just a big word for missing half your heart, basically. So the ventral valve, the left ventricle and the left atria did not form in the womb. So that whole left side of her heart was just not functioning, basically. So for these HLHS babies, they have a three-stage palliative surgery option that hopefully can basically extend the life and give you a quality of life and hopefully, it gets you to where you’re older and more stable to do a transplant is ultimately the goal. So there is not a cure. So that’s the path that we went down. So Harper was born the 21. She had open heart surgery on Day 4, 4 days old. She did really well. She conquered that surgery and stayed on intubated and on the vent for about a month. So we couldn’t hold her for that whole first month. And it was extremely just difficult, as anyone could imagine. And we stayed in the hospital altogether about two months straight. And here I am, working 7-on, 7-off night shifts. So I did use my PTO and a week here, week there. And my wife is staying there 24/7. She was the one there all the time while I was here at work. So it was very difficult, and during those two months, she got better, you know. Everything was going good. We were able to be discharged. So we got to bring her home for a month. And everything was great. Daily weights, there was a very close monitoring program that we actually had on the iPad from Arkansas Children’s Hospital. We’d take videos daily, monitor their weight. We’re literally writing down how many mils that she’s drinking every two or three hours throughout the day. So tracking it down to the milliliter, literally, and journaling that. So while the experience to monitor to make sure that they’re being fed right and that their fluid electrolyte balance in perfect, and it’s such a critical thing in these heart babies where something as small as that fluid and electrolyte difference can make a huge impact. So that month goes on while we have her home and it’s time for heart cath, just to check her heart function. So we go to the hospital and do this heart cath, and after that procedure, her heart developed a tricuspid regurgitation, so some blood flow was leaking out of that valve. And it never recovered. And it got to be severe tricuspid regurg. So she was basically in heart failure at that point and we had to start her on continuous IV drips for her heart function. And so this was about three months of age, and we were basically stuck inpatient there at that point thinking about the transplant list. So we’re meeting with the transplant team and organizing, getting all that set up, getting blood types, getting her registered. And Harper coded multiple times. And come to find, she had undiagnosed sepsis as well as heart failure. And she passed away on 9/11/2018. So at this point, it’s really just devastating for my wife and I. It totally just changes your life. And everything that you know as a parent, your routine, your role, everything just changes instantly. So as long as — as well as your identity. So everything as a parent, you know, is gone instantly. And it’s just major shock. So going through that grief and that entire process, working 7-on, 7-off, that was very difficult spending those seven nights away from my wife ultimately. So that’s what led me to this daytime Director of Pharmacy position was to be able to spend more time with my family and with my wife. So during that grieving process, that was a key, getting to spend more time together as both of us were going through that process.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and Phillip, I’m sure our listeners are thinking the same. My heart breaks for you and your wife. And just the situation as a father, I can’t even imagine what you guys went through. And I have to believe that we have one, two, 10, 100, maybe more people that are listening that are going through some type of grief or loss right now. You know, maybe it’s a similar situation, maybe it’s a job loss, maybe it’s a loss of a parent, a loss of a spouse, a loss of a child or something else. What words of encouragement would you have to share for somebody listening that is going through a moment of grief or loss right now?

Phillip Beach: Well, that’s my hope coming on here to talk to you today is that I can somehow spread a message of positivity to at least one person and impact their life and help them through whatever struggle they’re going through, to just make that choice every day to stay positive and know that these trials and things you go through will make you a better person in the end. And you never know who you can impact by choosing that positivity every day. And I’m not saying that I always win that battle. But every day, I try to make that conscious effort to be positive. And I think that is the key. And I know we talked about Adam Martin before, but he actually had a video on this I think yesterday that I saw between two different pharmacists, one choosing not being positive and the other being positive and being a great leader in their pharmacy. And I think that’s so key is making that choice daily, wanting to impact others and being a leader in that positivity to spread it to others. No one wants to be around a negative person. So I hope I can be that same light to someone that’s going through a tough situation.

Tim Ulbrich: And what gives you and your wife hope? What gave you hope through that time period of obviously losing Harper? But I sense this is something daily that you’re working through. Like what gives you guys hope going forward?

Phillip Beach: You know, really, we started Harper Faith Foundation, and that was one of the things that we could transform this tragedy into something triumphant. That was — that’s our goal to spread some hope to someone else that needs it. So we made the Harper Faith Foundation a nonprofit organization in January 2019. My wife started it up, did all the research, figured out how to do it, contacted LegalZoom, got that set up, it’s all official. And the outpouring that we’ve had from our community and our friends and our church and our support group, our family, to give back to us so that we can give out to others has been amazing. So that has been a source of hope for us. And being able to spread it to other people, that gives us joy. So ultimately, there’s nothing like giving back to other people. You don’t get that sense of joy from anything else.

Tim Ulbrich: And Phillip, one of the other things as I think through others that may be going through a situation of loss or grief would be that this topic of finance in and of itself is stressful, let alone when you’re going through a difficult situation. So talk us through for a moment about how you keep the financial plan afloat during a time of grief. Or maybe a better question is how do you give yourself permission or peace to just let it go temporarily, you know, in the midst of everything that you’re dealing with?

Phillip Beach: It’s definitely a balancing act. And I think it’s so key to live below your means in a lot of areas of your life but also realize that life is very fleeting and when you have something that you enjoy as a family to go and enjoy that and not worry about it. And realize that you have money to spend and go out and enjoy, go on vacation with your family, spend that time together, do what you can while you’re on your own because you don’t always have that time later down the road. And that’s another part of my life that I want to touch on. My dad unexpectedly passed in 2016 when I was right about to start my rotations. I was literally about three or four days from going to my first acute care rotations in Texas, he unexpectedly had a heart attack at 56. He was in great shape, he was ex-military. And that has also stuck with me and just convinced me that, you know, the balancing act and using your time while you have it because you can save for your 401k all day and all that, but it’s not a for sure thing that you’re going to live to 65 to get to enjoy it. So I definitely encourage people to be wise with their money but at the same time enjoy it and love your family and go and do the things that you like to do together.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes, such a good reminder, Phillip, of the balance of today versus the future, right? There’s responsibility in taking care of your future self but not fully at the expense of today and the needs that are around you but also as you mentioned just the experiences and the opportunities that you have of things to do. So I think that balance is so critical. So I think you answered this a little bit, you know, in that context of that balance of today and the future, but tell us a little bit more about as a guy who I sense is a financial nerd, right, you know, you’re kind of saving, balancing debt, and the questions you ask, how does money have a different meaning for you after you go through such a obviously situation of grief and loss such as that you did?

Phillip Beach: I think now, we’re more focused on giving back. And when we have extra funds, we don’t necessarily set aside a certain percentage or anything but you know, just kind of sporadically my wife will be like, “Hey, why don’t we help this family out?” Or, “Hey, why don’t we go up to Arkansas Children’s this weekend and bring them lunch?” Those are the kind of things that we like to do just on a whim. And that’s what we’re more focused on these days is giving back, doing what we can, as little as bringing someone that Chick-Fil-A at lunch in the hospital. It might not seem like much, but to them, that’s like — it’s a really big thing when these families are stuck inpatient for 3, 6, 12 months at a time. Some of these families are on the transplant list, like I said, and they literally don’t get to leave. They eat cafeteria food day-in and day-out. They’re there with their sick child and something just like bringing a meal is very uplifting. So that’s what our focus is on now is just giving when we can.

Tim Ulbrich: Especially a Chick-Fil-A meal, right? That makes anyone happy.

Phillip Beach: I know, right?

Tim Ulbrich: You know, I think what resonates with me when you said that is yes, it’s the meal. But it’s the gesture. It’s letting people know they’re not alone, that there’s a community that’s thinking about them, that’s praying for them, that’s encouraging them. And I think the meal is maybe the vehicle in which you’re able to do that. But obviously there’s a broader intention there. So let’s shift and talk about the Harper Faith Foundation, a 501c not-for-profit organization. You mentioned your wife set it up, which is awesome and we’ll talk a little bit more about that as well. But let’s just break it down. What is the mission and the work of the Harper Faith Foundation?

Phillip Beach: So our mission is to help other heart families and kind of like you said, building that community. There is — other heart families, you just have this bond with no one else has kind of gone through this situation like these people have. So you understand each other. And that’s kind of what we are making and building with Harper Faith Foundation. We aim to help out other heart families. So that is our goal is to provide some hope to them during these tough times.

Tim Ulbrich: And specifically as I understand it, you guys are doing work in a variety of different ways, including supporting families — you talked a little bit about this — supporting families, but I think there’s some other components as well with research. So talk us through the specific areas of the work of the Harper Faith Foundation.

Phillip Beach: Yeah, so we help other families through a variety of ways. One of the things we like the most is promoting research. So we were actually involved with two studies with Mayo Clinic. They took stem cells from the umbilical cord blood when Harper was born and they froze them and they were planning to use those in the Stage 2 surgery and they were injecting them directly into the heart to try to make that side of the heart stronger, the right ventricle, so that it could kind of take over some of that workload that the left isn’t doing. That’s one of our joys is to help with the research process and try to find not necessarily a cure because there isn’t a cure right now but just make advancements in this field because the prognosis is just very poor right now. And like I said, it’s a three-stage palliative operation. And that’s really all they can offer right now besides transplant. So we love to be involved in that. Sadly, we didn’t get to that Stage 2 operation to get to use those stem cells. But still, they were happy to be able to participate with Mayo Clinic in that. We also participated in another Mayo Clinic study with DNA. So my wife and I both took mouth swabs, and they’re trying to find a genetic link to see what is going on here. They haven’t exactly determined the link yet. But you know, there’s got to be something there more than meets the eye. So we’re happy to be involved in that too. Another way that we help is just by giving gift bags to the families that are inpatients at the CDICU. These gift bags include a lot of items like children’s books, newborn socks, newborn onesies, pacifier, stuffed animals, toiletries for mom and dad while they’re staying there inpatient in the hospital. There’s a water bottle, Kleenex, individual Tide packets so you can do your laundry there at the hospital. And we also put a binder in there to keep all your child’s medical information. And that’s one of our favorite parts is including this binder because you’re bombarded every day with so much medical information. And a lot of the times, you just freeze because it’s two steps backward, one step forward constantly. And when it’s with your kid and they’re telling you these diagnosis and stuff, it’s so important to have this medical information with you on paper, in a binder, somewhere where you can access it quickly just because a lot of times, it doesn’t sink in when the doctor is telling you these heavy diagnosis. So that’s one of the things we love most about these gift bags, giving those to the families. And then we also — we do a yearly college scholarship for a high school senior that’s going into their freshman year specifically to someone that has a congenital heart defect. So we’re very happy to be able to do that. And we started that this past year. And we would like to be able to increase it every year. Not only increase the value of the scholarship but as time goes on, we would like it be two scholarships, three scholarships, four scholarships, and just keep it growing. We’re just happy to be able to pay it back, and we’re so thankful that our friends and family has helped support us to be able to give back to others as well.

Tim Ulbrich: And I love what you said earlier, Phillip, you know, taking tragedy and turning it into triumph and really being able to make a difference. I think you have been tangibly — you and your wife, obviously — tangibly have been doing that. So thank you for sharing. For our listeners that are hearing that and saying, “I want to learn more about the Harper Faith Foundation,” or perhaps even give to the foundation, where can they go?

Phillip Beach: They can go to our Facebook page, Harper Faith Foundation. That’s probably the best place to get in touch with us. We have an Amazon link if you’d like to donate. And it has all of the items that we include in these gift bags to the families. So literally things like pacifier, the animals, the socks for the newborn, everything that goes in there you can get and reach out to us, connect with us, see what you can do to get involved and learn more.

Tim Ulbrich: So Harper Faith Foundation Facebook group. And we’ll link to that in the show notes for those that want to go onto the website when we publish this episode. You know, the other thing I’m thinking about here, Phil, is I sense many of the YFP community members have a desire to start a nonprofit for a variety of reasons and may look at that and say, “Well, that’s a really daunting, overwhelming task to start a 501c3.” So you mentioned your wife working with LegalZoom are really taking the lead on that process. Talk to us a little bit more — while I know you didn’t do it directly — about the intensity of doing that and hopefully an encouragement to others that, you know, it’s not something that can’t be overcome, can’t be done.

Phillip Beach: Yeah, definitely. So she — like I said, she did the whole process herself. She did all of the research and figured out LegalZoom was the route that we wanted to take. There’s a bunch of questions that you have to answer, of course, to get involved. And they basically assign you a legal team, they set it all up, and it’s a fairly straightforward process once you get it going. I would compare it to TurboTax and filing your taxes. They kind of pinpoint you questions to answer and lead you down the path, and it’s pretty simple as far as that goes.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Awesome. So shifting to your financial plan for a couple moments here as we wrap up, before we had the interview, you had mentioned that you and your wife are interested or moving on the path towards Financial Independence Retire Early, the FIRE movement. We have previous episodes that we’ll link to in the show notes where we’ve talked about this. So tell me more about the motivation. Why is FIRE an area that you and your wife are interested in and pursuing?

Phillip Beach: So I like FIRE for a variety of reasons. But I guess the main thing is having more time and freedom to do what you want and spend that time with your family. Obviously it’s a long-term goal for us. My wife is still in school right now, so that is our focus right now is getting her through school and letting her accomplish her dreams, becoming a nurse and going to nurse practitioner, getting her doctorate. That’s our focus right now. But the opportunity to spend more time with your family, that’s really what we’re striving for.

Tim Ulbrich: Love the clarity of the why there. And typically, you know, student loans are the biggest barrier to people being able to achieve financial independence because you need to obviously be saving aggressively, and student loan payments, you and I both know, can be really big at times. So for your student loan situation, as I understand it, you were on a Public Service Loan Forgiveness Track working for a not-for-profit hospital but then switching to a for-profit hospital that that path changed a little bit. So talk to us about your current student loan repayment strategy.

Phillip Beach: Right, so I was on the PSLF with the nonprofit and I changed to this DOP role, and now it’s a for-profit hospital. But so still on the same loan forgiveness path, but now it’s including the tax bomb, basically, and a little bit longer of a plan. And that’s our plan for right now. And you know, with this whole pandemic and things changing daily, who knows what’s going to happen in the future? But right now, that’s what we’re doing.

Tim Ulbrich: Well right now, you’re in a pretty sweet spot. You know, we were talking before the show that obviously with the passage of the CARES Act, for somebody such as yourself that’s pursuing non-PSLF or even those that are pursuing PSLF, essentially you’re going to get six months worth of credits but have a $0 payment, 0% interest, essentially for six months, end of September. TBD after that. So at least for the foreseeable future, it’s a good place, good place to be in. Couple questions I have for you about the non-PSLF track. First one would be we often don’t talk with folks about how they’re thinking about or saving for the tax bomb. So for a moment, let me just explain for those listening that may not be familiar in that if somebody’s pursuing non-Public Service Loan Forgiveness inside the federal system, instead of 10 years with PSLF and that being tax-free forgiveness, with non-PSLF, as you mentioned, it’s longer and it’s not tax-free forgiveness. So for example, if you have $100,000 at the point of applying for forgiveness after 20 or 25 years, depending on your plan, that essentially gets treated like income that year, and you have to be preparing for the “tax bomb” that will be coming, which could be sizable, depending on one’s student loan amount and the amount that’s forgiven. So the question often comes then, you know, how do you plan for it? Do you worry about it now? Do you worry about it later? Where do you put those monies? So how are, Phillip, thinking through the preparation of the tax bomb?

Phillip Beach: So I guess there’s a lot of strategy I’ve read about online, and I’m thankful for so much content and resources from the YFP community and there’s some other physician bloggers for finances. And I guess right now, it’s a little bit of both, worrying about it now and in the future. And hopefully during this whole time period, you can set aside funds to a separate account and that is basically your tax bomb fund is how I’m thinking about it. And so when that time comes, you’re ready for that. Or hopefully it’s even a larger amount than that, and if the whole forgiveness thing washes out and you’re not — and that’s not a possibility, you have enough in that side fund to just completely pay it off. So that is kind of my long-term goal there.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. And while you’re in this situation that’s somewhat unique of six qualifying payments and you have to make a payment and if I remember correctly, you said your monthly payment was just shy of about $1,000 per month. So talk us through like what’s your strategy during this unique COVID-19 situation where you don’t have to make a payment? How are you thinking about utilizing those resources that would otherwise go towards student loans?

Phillip Beach: Well, you know, it’s such a fluid thing. But I’m waiting to get more information. So again, I’m thankful for your guys’ website putting out almost daily information bits on that. But we will probably hammer off some of the remaining debt that we have just a little bit left on my wife’s car. You know, that’s very tempting to go ahead and take care of. That’s probably our biggest interest rate right now. So that might be what it goes to. If I don’t have to make student loan payments for the next six months, that’s probably what will happen.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, it’s a time where you can be a little bit more opportunistic, right? Especially if you’ve got other parts of the plan tidied up in terms of emergency fund, credit card debt. I think it’s an opportunity to be opportunistic with those funds that would have otherwise gone towards student loans. So long-term, Phillip, there’s an interest, passion perhaps, to open up your own gym. So tell us more about that.

Phillip Beach: I’ve always been interested in maybe having my own small business one day. And I’ve been always been interested in nutrition and exercise. So that just seems like a no-brainer to me. And actually, my brother and I have always had this dream I feel like of just opening up our own gym and making that a reality one day. And the whole thought of doing something that you really love every day. And not only that, but it’s a place to help people. I can’t help but think of how much chronic illness we deal with here in America, and it’s just — it’s the cure for it basically is how I see it. Moving more, exercising more, can — it’s just the cure.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and it reminds me of the episode we had with TJ Allen, who is a owner of a couple different gyms as well as an independent pharmacy owner, previously on the show. Just another example of kind of a passion for fitness, entrepreneurial type of mindset, and certainly strategic when it comes to his financial plan. So Phillip, thank you so much. I mean, this has been a great interview, certainly has inspired and I’m confident will do the same for our audience. I appreciate your willingness to come on, record this very early, 6 a.m. your time here this morning when we hit record and certainly willing for your — appreciate your willingness to share the journey that you’ve had with Harper Faith, obviously you and your wife, and more about the Harper Faith Foundation. So thank you so much.

Phillip Beach: Well thank you for having me on. And again, I hope this message can bring some positivity to at least one person and inspire them to keep going and get through those trials in their life. So again, thank you for having me on and thank you to all of our frontline healthcare workers too, the nursing staff, retail pharmacists, everyone out there that’s out there on the frontlines dealing with this pandemic. So just want to give a shoutout to you guys too.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you, Phillip.

Phillip Beach: Thank you, Tim.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 146: COVID-19: Financial Considerations


COVID-19: Financial Considerations

Things are changing on a daily basis secondary to COVID-19. In these unprecedented times, there are a lot of financial concerns people are likely having. On this episode sponsored by APhA, Tim Baker, CFP® answers questions about investing, the uncertainty of work and student loans.

Summary

This podcast is from the APhA and YFP webinar recorded on March 31, 2020. In the past couple of weeks, so much has changed as a result of COVID-19. Between the stock market being down, unemployment rising, the CARES Act and rapid changes with federal student loans, it’s likely that you have a lot of questions regarding your finances.

During this discussion, Tim Baker, CFP® answers the questions everyone has at the top of their mind and focuses on the topics of investments, uncertainty of work and student loans. He also dives into the CARES Act and the levers you can pull if you’re facing financial hardship due to unemployment or a reduction in hours.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Well, good evening and welcome to this webinar. My name is Tim Ulbrich from the team over at Your Financial Pharmacist, and I’m excited to also have joining me my partner in crime and Certified Financial Planner Tim Baker as we’re going to talk about a big-time topic right now, which is financial considerations and COVID-19. So thank you so much for taking time out of your schedule to be here tonight. Thank you for those that during the registration process, you submitted questions and concerns that you have. That really helped us shape how we’ll spend our time this evening. And we’re also going to have time to take your questions throughout the evening as well. So thank you again. And first and foremost, before we jump in to individual topics, I know many listening or perhaps those that couldn’t be here tonight that will watch the replay are on the frontlines of this, putting themselves at risk and obviously stress that comes along with that and carrying that risk back home. So thank you so much for the work that you’re doing for the patients that you’re serving. And we certainly appreciate that effort.

So so many financial issues that are swirling around a time like this. And we’re going to try to hit some of the major ones, certainly not all of them knowing there’s so much changing so quickly, literally some days it seems like by the hour. At least by the day, we have some piece of news that’s coming out as it relates to COVID-19 and something related to the financial plan. If we look at just the past couple weeks as an example, we’ve seen the markets really take a significant hit. As of this morning, the Dow Jones was down roughly 25% from its February peak. And we actually saw that was inching closer to 40% last week before we saw an increase at the end of last week. Unemployment rate predictions are upwards of 30%. We certainly hope that many pharmacists aren’t going to be in that figure, but we’ve already seen a significant rise in unemployment claims in this area. We saw news of the fed cutting interest rates. And in one week, we had three pieces of big news related to student loans. First, the announcement from the Trump administration that we would be freezing interest rates on student loans for 60 days. Then, the announcement that there would be a pause of payments due for a 60-day period. And then of course, with the stimulus package that was passed last Friday, ultimately as we’ll talk about in more detail tonight, six-month window on most federal loans in terms of pausing the payments as well as interest accrual during that time. So certainly big news here in the last couple weeks as it relates to student loans.

So lots of things to talk about, and a brief introduction to the format. Then we’ll jump right in, and I’m going to put Tim Baker on the hot seat and start firing away your questions as we talk about really three big buckets of topics that we saw come through as themes when you all registered for this webinar this evening. One was around investments, you know, what do I do in terms of my investments during an uncertain time period such as this? How does my investing strategy change? So we’ll talk about that in detail. The second around the uncertainty of work and what this time period means in terms of employment and changes and we know some of you may be dealing with this more for others. And how does that impact the financial plan? And what could you be doing during this time of uncertainty? And then last of course would be student loans. And as I mentioned earlier, there’s a lot, a lot to talk about here. So in terms of the format, what we’re going to do is I have gathered some questions in advance, and I’m going to fire away at Tim Baker in each one of these three areas: investments, work uncertainty, and student loans. And then we’ll pause at the end of each of those sections to answer some of your questions. We may not get to all of them, but we’ll try to get to as many as we possibly can this evening. So if you have a question as you’re hearing some of the discussion this evening, please go ahead and submit that in the chat, and then I’m going to ask Drew from APhA, who’s on the call this evening, to help us field those questions and we’ll take a couple breaks throughout.

I do want to thank before we get started as well the American Pharmacists Association for the continued partnership that we have with Your Financial Pharmacist to provide financial education resources that are exclusive to APhA members. So this is one example, but we’ve been doing webinars often and live events. We have discounts on our products and services, including comprehensive financial planning, which you can learn more about at YFPPlanning.com. So to check out a lot of the resources that we’ve done with APhA, you can go to pharmacists.com/YFP and get more information about that partnership and even go back and watch some of the webinars that we’ve done over the past couple years.

Alright, Tim Baker, officially welcome. That was a long introduction, but welcome.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And I know this is a chaotic time, so thank you for taking time out of your schedule to do this.

Tim Baker: Yeah, of course. Happy to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: So we know that many of your clients at Your Financial Pharmacist certainly are having a lot of questions. So many of these you probably already have gotten, but we’re going to go through, as I mentioned, each of these in more detail in three different buckets. So let’s start with investments. And I think probably the most common question that we’re seeing in a time period such as this, which is really similar — while the situation is different — similar market drops to what we saw in 2008 is what should I be doing as I think about my account being down? So the question here is my accounts are down 25% — so assuming your retirement accounts — from mid-February. How should my investing strategy change during this uncertain time where it appears there’s no end in sight to this pandemic and the havoc that it’s wreaking? So talk to us about investment strategy broadly during a time period like this.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so — again, if people have heard me answer these questions, I’m going to start off with the worst answer ever. It’s going to depend. So a lot of our listeners are 20-something, 30-something, 40-something year-olds. And if your portfolio goes down now and you’re planning to retire when you’re 50, 60, 70, it doesn’t matter that much. Now, I don’t want to be facetious in saying that because it’s still painful when you look at hey, I had $200,000 in my portfolio and now I have $160,000 or something to that effect. That’s never fun, and we as human, those losses that we feel, the loss aversion really takes hold of us and it’s not fun. But the fact of the matter is that in most cases, these types of corrections, which last time was a subprime mortgage crisis that was created by kind of poor lending practices, this is a pandemic. I thought we were going to have kind of a downturn in the market due to an election. But this is kind of something that’s come out of nowhere, in essence, that’s really affected the market. And typically, these types of things, they last in the long run three years, three and a half years. So again, if you’re — I’m 37. I’ll use my example. If I’m going to work until I’m 67, that’s 30 years. I’m probably not going to even remember this unless I think about all of the Netflix I watched or the Zoom conferences that I had with my family, the games that we played. So now, the equation is a little bit different if you are kind of further along and closer to retirement. So probably some of the worst years to take a recession or to take a hit in your portfolio is right as you’re about to retire. So you know, 2, 3, 4, 5 years out. And the reason for that is when you start withdrawing on your portfolio in retirement, now you’re taking principal out, and you have to make up those gains that much more. So going through the eye of the storm in retirement is kind of like the couple years out to a couple years into retirement, which is when you probably want to be the most conservative. So depending on what side of the coin you’re on, that’s going to be a big part of it. Now, I was talking with a counterpart that said, hey, a bunch of his clients are reaching out and they’re like, how am I doing? And most of his clients are OK because he’s built out basically a bond ladder to get them through recession-like downturns in the market. So they’re basically priming that and maybe a little bit too much for this particular talk, but it really depends on where you’re at. So I would say as a general principle, a general rule of thumb with investments, you typically want to do the opposite of how you feel. So you know, when the subprime mortgage crisis was going on or right before the subprime mortgage crisis, people were taking out money from everywhere to buy real estate. When the dot-com crisis happened, right at the peak of that, people were taking out second mortgages on their house to buy cats.com. So in that case, we know that the markets probably inflated, and we want to be a little bit more conservative. I’m not saying do anything vastly different, but in the downturn, you know, when we see that slight, that drawdown, we typically want to take our investment ball and go home. So that’s what I tell my clients is that you don’t want to take your investment ball and go home. You actually want to do the opposite. You want to keep playing. If you can, you want to play some more, which means that if you are in a good cash position, get money to the market. Now, I often — and I said this last time we talked about this — sometimes I think financial advisors or we as humans, we rationalize away the loss and we’ll say, oh, it’s a great time to buy. It is kind of because when Trump was elected last time, I’m like, oh, the market, it’s overpriced, we’re going to see a correction, not a great time to buy. And that’s kind of the levels we’re at now. So it’s relative, right? But to me, the rule of thumb here is typically the more that you do, the worse. The more tinkering, the more you try to like outfool, outplay the market, it’s not going to work. You know, best rule of thumb is if you’re kind of in this situation where you’re in this accumulation phase, if you can invest more, invest more. If you can be a little bit more aggressive, be a little bit more aggressive. I often say that if you’re kind of in your 20s, 30s and 40s, you probably shouldn’t have any bonds in your portfolio at all. That’s my belief just because basically they’re a drag on your investments. When you get closer to retirement and there’s more safety in principal, then you want to put bonds in there and start really building out kind of that retirement paycheck, that bond ladder. So lots of words, lot of different ways to look at that. At the end of the day, this too shall pass. Markets will go up, it’s part of the general cycle of things. We’re basically being forced into this one a little bit more because of the pandemic, but we were also on an 11-year bull market, a positive market, really since the last downturn. So yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great stuff. And Tim, this really has been a reminder for me in a couple areas. It’s something we preach and teach, but when it hits you directly, it’s a gut check to say, do I really believe in what I preach and teach? And you know, we talk about volatility and the irrationality of the markets and who can predict it, what a great example this has been. I mean, nobody can say they — now, some people might say I saw a bubble and it was eventually going to pop, yadda yadda yadda ya, but nobody predicted COVID-19 specifically. Maybe Bill Gates. But nobody predicted the impact that that would have at this time period and obviously the unemployment, all the impacts we’ve had. But also I think it’s just been a good reminder of some of the investing principles and strategies that I know I’m highly leveraged in stocks, you see a significant drop, I log into my accounts, I want to take action. I know I shouldn’t take action, so for me, this has also been a really good reminder of the value of having a coach in your corner, on your team, in a time period like this to really help you take a step back and look at the whole plan and to really go back and think, what’s the goal? What are we trying to do? What’s the timeline? And a period like this quickly becomes very emotional, not objective, and I think having somebody else that can really help you navigate a difficult time like this is a great reminder.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and my overall belief — I have a few of them — but my overall belief for investments is that investments should be as boring and budgeting. It should be as boring as paying off the debt. It should not be sexy, it shouldn’t be exciting. I think oftentimes when we make it that, that’s where we get into trouble because we’re typically going into investments that maybe cost too much. So when you think about like, oh, this is a smart beta fund, it’s going to cost the investor a lot of money. You know, even I am like, oh man, maybe I should buy this stock because it’s trading really low. And the example I gave the last time we talked about this is you know, when we had corrections in the ‘80s and ‘90s, my first employer out of the Army was Sears. Sears was this giant company that was never going to go away, it was retail supreme, kind of like the Amazon of today. It’s trading at like $.31 a share right now because they just were — so everyone thinks well maybe Amazon — I don’t think Amazon shares are down — but maybe that other, that Walmart or that other stock. So you start twisting your mustache to say hey, maybe I can outsmart the market, maybe this is a great time to buy. And my belief — and again, I do this for a living — is I just become overwhelmingly humbled again and again by that. So you can — I think it’s OK, my personal opinion, to take a small percent, 5-10%, and speculate on stocks. I don’t personally do it anymore because I, again, I’m tired of being humbled by the market. I like to buy the market. It treats you right over the long term and just rebalance it over time. So one of the things that I think you can do if you’re up for it is that if you’re not in something like a target date fund, you know, when I’m reviewing — I reviewed a client’s patient, actually one of the clients are about to be forgiven for PSLF. They’re two months away. Yeah, one of the things that we looked at their TSP and the spouse’s 401k, very out of balance in terms of like their equity to fixed income ratio. So one of the things we were going to go do — and we can do this for them with some of the tools that we have — is we basically rebalance that back because right now their portfolio is more conservative than what they signed up because equities are depressed and as a result, the fixed income makes up a bigger percentage. So we’re basically going to rebalance those out. Now, my counsel to them is get rid of the bonds in general. They’re about my age, a little bit older. But they’re kind of in a 90-10 stocks to bonds split. So that’s maybe one thing that you can do to tinker or change. And in reality, you should do that once or twice per year. And I think that’s good.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that’s a good reminder. I haven’t seen a lot of discussion on in this area of investing is making sure you’re looking at your distributions and rebalancing appropriately as a time period like this can certainly throw things off. So to your comment, you alluded to this, and I’d like to talk more about this. Question here is for several people that are listening that may be in a position to invest, you know, they might look at a time like this and say, “OK, is this a time I should be doubling down? Should I do it? Should I wait? Should I hold that money for other uses, depending on a certain time? Where do I begin to think about how to invest that money?” So talk us through more of the opportunistic side of if I have money to invest, is this a period where I want to make that move?

Tim Baker: Yeah. And again, it depends, Tim, again. I’ll say that again and again. You know, if we look at your balance sheet and you have that emergency fund that’s fully plussed up, your consumer debt is in line so you’re not really — you don’t have any credit card debt or you’re not paying that couch off that you bought a year ago when you moved into your house, you know, and you feel pretty secure, as secure as you can be, now might be a good opportunity to start increasing that 401k contribution, that 403b contribution. If you haven’t dabbled in IRAs, you can open up IRAs to basically supplement that. But you know, right now, I think because of what we’re seeing, my inclination for — in a lot of ways is to kind of sit on the cash and put it in a high-yield account, get your 1.5% interest rate now and call it a day. But you know, me personally, I have shoveled some money into the IRAs as I can, just to get that money into the market and working. But I also feel fairly confident in kind of cash position and where we’re at. So yeah, I think it depends on a lot of factors like if you’re a one-income, two-income household and just some of those other things. Now, we’ll talk about this in a second, but one of the big things is that between now — really, March 13 to end of September, for federal loans, $0 payments, 0% interest, so one of the big things — and we talk about this on the podcast all the time, if you guys are not familiar with YFP podcast, check us out. But one of the things we talk about is really acting and planning with intent. So one of the things I’m talking about with clients is hey, you have this $800 per month federal loan payment for your Pay As You Earn. Now that’s going away, and if you’re going for a forgiveness play, you know, PSLF, that still counts. The $0 payment still counts for September, all the way up until September. So what can we do with that $800? And it might be to get the emergency fund further plussed up. It could be to pay off a car, credit card debt. It could be to invest. And I think all of those things are on the table. But I think ultimately, what we don’t want to do is just say,”Oh, sweet, there’s an extra $800 into the pot.” We as humans, we see a copious resource and consume it, whether it’s time or money. So really be intentional and call out, OK, this $800 is going to go right into my Ally emergency fund — I like Ally — or some other emergency fund that you have. Or it’s going to go, I’m going to schedule that payment to go right into my IRA I can contribute for 2019 all the way up until July of this year. So lots of different kind of ways to look at it.

Tim Ulbrich: So for those that are looking to invest and have extra money that they want to then utilize this time period to implement that strategy, I would reference you back, all the way back, to November 2018, which seems forever ago, on the podcast. Episodes 072, 073, 074, 075 and 076, we did a month-long series all about investing, including the priority of investing and commonly asked questions around investing. And I think that material would be helpful to make sure you’re strategically making those decisions as you invest those funds. Tim, other question here — we’ll round out this section on investing as we transition to some of the uncertainty around work, and I’d remind people if they have questions about investing, please submit them now — is the time of rainy day fund emergency savings. You know, we normally preach and teach 3-6 months, depends on individual factors, if you have one income, two incomes, how comfortable, are you not with the amount of funds that are available, what are the priorities you’re trying to achieve? So my question here, is this a time period you look at — and you might have alluded to this a little bit already — where you say, “Maybe there is a time period where somebody who normally would be 3, maybe it should look more like 6?” Or somebody who’s normally at 6 months, this should be larger than 6 months. How do you typically advise clients on the rainy day fund during a time period like this?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, a lot of those I think have been set by like the Certified Planning Board and they’ve gone through multiple iterations of downturns in the market and things like that. You know, the danger of having more than 6 months in cash is that your cash position is too much and that you should really have some of that money into the market. Now again, that gets put to the test when you’re out of work and you can’t find employment or that type of thing. So I don’t think systemically, anything really changes. But you know, I look at my own — one of the things that I, we get stuck on sometimes is, you know, I meet with a client and I say, “Hey, your emergency fund needs to be $20,000.” And then you know, they maybe move and buy a new house, maybe they have a kid and like we don’t go back and kind of refresh that.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And that needs to be refreshed. So you know, basically what I do from the outset is I say, “Hey, this is what a good emergency fund is. This is where I would put it.” And then we build the savings around that. So I’m a big proponent of having like savings built out for things that are kind of more in line with your goals. So the emergency fund anchors that and then we have kind of secondary and tertiary savings goals. So I don’t think it really changes anything systemically, but I also like one of my bias is that for me, like if I was out of a job like this, like I would figure it out. And I don’t care what I have to do, like I would hustle. And part of that’s kind of just the entrepreneur coming out in me. Not everyone has that, you know? So if you’re more conservative with kind of going out and trying to find income streams, which sometimes pharmacists are, then maybe you do for this period of time try to shuttle away more and then when basically things come to more normalcy, then you kind of get back to that 3-6 months. So I think if you have the cash and you can plus up your account a little bit more, that makes sense. But I think as we go, a lot of the questions people are asking is like, how is this going to change society? How is this going to change how we interact with people and our spending habits and things like that? I don’t know if it really will. Maybe it does. I kind of look back at like 9/11, and you know, now we are however many years later, and it’s like ugh, I have to take my shoes off when I fly in an airplane.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And you know, I was my freshman year at West Point when that happened. And obviously that was a big, big thing in my life just like it was in everyone’s life. But I think that over time, things erode, we forget, and I think there will be a time when we can go to the movies and not feel scared about getting sick or whatever that is. And I think the same is true with our spending, how we save, and all that kind of stuff.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think this is a good time as we’re wrapping up this section talking about rainy day funds, you know, one of the things that I always mention, especially when you have two people that are working through a financial plan together, is I don’t think this is the place to push somebody else.

Tim Baker: No, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So really making sure you are having an honest conversation about during uncertainty like this, sometimes it’s not rational, what makes you comfortable? And obviously there has to be a reasonable balance of that as you’re trying to achieve other goals and do other things. You know, as you mentioned, you don’t want to have too much in the cash position. But if you’re splitting hairs between 4 and 5 months and somebody is more comfortable with 5 months or 6 months, like this is the place to defer, you know, as you look at making sure that both spouses, both individuals that are working on this together are comfortable with that. So Drew, at this point, as we wrap up this investing section and talk about COVID-19 and the financial implications as it relates to investing, I want to pause here and address any questions that have come in specific to investing as we move on to the next topic about work uncertainty.

Drew: Sure, thanks, Tim. So we’ll start with the first question here. For those at home who are kind of relying on financial planners to really manage their investments and maybe they’re looking to gain more knowledge and education around this topic, where might you guys recommend that they start to get that education and really start to learn about investing on their own?

Tim Ulbrich: Great question. Tim Baker, do you want to start and then I’ll chime in?

Tim Baker: I mean, I’m biased. I think right here, right? Like this is a good spot. What I tell clients when we go through any part of the financial plan, whether it’s the fundamentals: insurance and benefits, retirement investment, estate, tax credits, negotiation, whatever that is, just to kind of name a few parts of the plans that we cover, I want to educate clients in a way that it’s enough to make you dangerous but not enough to bore you to death. So we probably could release — I mean, you know, what Tim and Tim wrote, “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” is another great tool, resource, to — if you’re a reader, you know, I can probably name off a bunch on my kind of read list that would go onto the Mount Rushmore of investment books to read: “Index Revolution” is one. I don’t know, Tim, what am I missing here?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great recommendations on books. “MONEY Master the Game” is something that I typically recommend as a book.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: They do a nice job some of the complexities of investing in a very easy to understand way. Obviously, I put a plug in for our comprehensive financial planning services that Your Financial Pharmacist specifically designed for pharmacy professionals. And you can learn more about that at YFPPlanning.com. And we have some exclusive benefits to APhA members. Two other things that jump out to me: One, I mentioned the investing series we did on the podcast back in November 2018. Again, Episodes 072-076. So you can download that on Apple podcasts, Spotify, or wherever you get your podcasts each and every week — sounds like a commercial. And then the last thing for APhA members, since we’re here obviously in that, is that we’ve done — you’ve done — previous webinars I believe Investing 101, Investing 102, that are available recorded. And again, you can access those at pharmacists.com/YFP. So I think a whole lot of resources, probably strategically identifying one or two to get started and not getting overwhelmed. But I think even for those that have a financial planner, you know, whether it’s us or somebody else, I think making sure — this is true of any part of the financial plan — making sure you’re educated and up-to-speed yourself I think just leads to a richer conversation and a greater understanding and you’re asking more questions, typically, when you are more knowledgeable about a topic. So you know, I think sometimes there’s a tendency to say, “Oh, I’ve got my investment guy, right? I’ve got somebody that’s doing this for me.” And I think it’s always helpful to have some of the base knowledge yourself as well. Awesome. Drew, what else?

Drew: Awesome. Thanks, Tim. Next question. Is it risky to put money into a savings account where you don’t have close access to the bank? Also, should you have some money not in the bank in case the market crashes?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s a good question. So the first question I’m guessing they’re referring to like an online bank perhaps is the way I interpret that versus like a local branch that you can walk through the doors. I mean, I don’t know, Tim Baker, how you feel. I don’t necessarily view online banks such as Ally, CIT Bank, others that are out there that have online savings accounts, to me, I don’t like at that any different than me walking through the doors of a Huntington branch here in Columbus. You know, as long as they’re FDI-insured, obviously you’re looking for competitive product and offering. I feel like from a security standpoint and an offering standpoint, I very much view a physical location similar to an online bank. And obviously you and I have both used Ally extensively and are comfortable with that. What are your thoughts on the cash part of it? This has come up before, I think in our webinar last week about is this a time period where you actually want to have physical cash in hand. What are your thoughts on that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I had a client ask me this, and I’ve been asked this a couple times since this has all been going on. And I can’t see — I have like a strong — you know, I actually had a client talk about it today. You know, it’s like, we’re not Doomsdayers, but should we keep some cash in the house? And I’m like, I don’t know. I feel like the banks, one of the lessons learned from the last crisis, the banks are more robust and stronger than they’ve probably ever been. And at the end of the day, like what the government is trying to do is figure out ways to get money into the hands of the people and really businesses. So I don’t have this overwhelming personal need to have stacks of cash in a safe in my house in Baltimore, Maryland. So you know, and I remember the first time I talked about this with a client, I said, “You know, if there is a run on like ATMs, maybe that could be a thing. But then you could always go to the grocery store and like take out cash when you did.” But the second I said that the last two times, I’ve been to the grocery store. They basically turned that off.

Tim Ulbrich: Turned it off, yep.

Tim Baker: And my thought was like, OK, grocery stores are flush because everyone’s buying toilet paper and everything else. But yeah, so maybe. I think though, it’s like you can do everything electronic these days anyway. So people are like, what if you need cash? I’m like, Venmo or PayPal? They’re like, well my parents are old, they’re older and they haven’t used all that stuff. I don’t know. I just don’t — I personally don’t see it. But again, a lot of this goes back to how you feel. So if it makes you feel better to have $1,000 in the house, then do it. I don’t think there’s anything terribly wrong with it. I feel like growing up, my mom would hide money around the house. I don’t know why, it was just one of her things, you know, just like little nest eggs. So I don’t know.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree with you. And I think unfortunately, right now since we’re all pretty much quarantined for the most part is if I had $1,000 in cash, I ain’t really going anywhere where I can spend that cash right now. You know, most of it at least what we’re doing from grocery and other standpoint, you know, we’re pre-ordering and picking it up and that kind of thing. So good question, thought, but I echo your comments and feelings. I think you’ve also got to ask yourself, how does this make you feel? And how does that sway your decisions?

Tim Baker: Yeah, and another thing I talk to clients about is like, I’ll say something to the effect of like outside the Zombie Apocalypse, the market’s going to go up. And if we have the Zombie Apocalypse, we have such bigger problems than our investment portfolio. And I think the same is true, it’s like if all of a sudden the banks collapse and we can’t get cash, like the cash might be worthless, you know? So there might be more systemic things to worry about. So probably not the right kind of tone of the conversation, but I just, yeah, I think you’re OK with trusting the banks.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and if that happens, you’re not making student loan payments.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: A lot of things aren’t getting paid.

Tim Baker: Right, I agree.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a depressing thought. So Drew, how about one more before we keep the ball rolling and move onto the next section? And then we can also hold some time at the end.

Drew: Sure. Absolutely. And I just wanted to mention, guys, I know we have a lot of questions coming in, a lot of questions around student loan repayment, and so we do have a couple more topics, one of those being student loan repayment. So we will do our best to get to those questions. So I think we’ll just finish up with a comment. We had a comment from someone come in, they said they’re a member of the Pharmacist Stock Club. It’s a great local opportunity for meeting, learning, and idea sharing. So if you’re interested, try to find and join a local club. So I just wanted to follow up to the question we had earlier about kind of getting started in investing and learning about those options. So I thought that was a good comment to add.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: For sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Very cool. I love the passion for learning. And whoever submitted that comment, I’d love to hear more from you about what that looks like and how you do it and perhaps we can share with others that may be looking to start something in their own community or even in these times, start something virtually. So let’s transition to the next area, which I would say led the way in those that registered. When we asked the question, you know, what are you most concerned with your financial plan as it relates to COVID-19, there was this bucket around uncertainty of work. And we know certain situations — I would say they’re not very frequent right now from what we can gather — but we know there’s certain situations where folks have reduced hours because of lower senses at the hospital as they’re waiting for the surges to happen into the future. You know, we do know that many might be impacted by whether it’s not necessarily their own cut hours, it could be a spouse, a family member that is being impacted, or somebody that has a business or a side hustle, I think about things like Airbnb income, or it could be somebody that even gets sick with COVID and is unable to work for a period of time. So you know, I think this is an important topic that we spend a little bit of time in. And I want to kick off the discussion here, Tim Baker, for those that are listening and are concerned about either current situations of reduced hours or that that may come in the future or their job is impacted in one way or another, what are some things that they can be thinking about with their financial plan to prepare for that situation? Big question, I know.
Tim Baker: Yeah, so there’s so many different facets to this point. So like, you know, one of the things and really the ink is still drying, so maybe I’ll talk more about the CARES Act that President Trump signed into law last Friday. So real quick, the CARES Act stands for the Coronavirus Aid Relief and Economic Securities Act that was passed by the Senate, then the House, then signed into law by Trump last Friday. We’re still basically reading and deciphering like what is actually included in here and how it’s all going to work. But really, it’s a $2 trillion emergency fiscal stimulus package, which is aimed to ease the effects of kind of the economic damage that that this is really causing. This is the largest economic stimulus package in U.S. history, actually it’s more like $6 trillion when you factor in like loan provisions and guarantees that the U.S. government is making. A good part of this, about half a trillion, $500 billion, is for stimulus checks, could be more for — $500 billion for severely damaged industries, $400 for wages and payroll tax relief and on and on. So I think the biggest thing that I would probably do if I was concerned or if I was furloughed or something like that is actually file for unemployment. So we did see a big spike, probably the largest spike I think ever, 3.3 million people filed for unemployment between March 15 and March 21. That was the biggest I think spike in history. But a lot of people, they’re like, ah, there’s maybe a stigma side. It doesn’t matter. At the end of the day, we’ve got to pay the bills. You pay into it as a taxpayer, so this is a benefit for the purposes of that is to actually file for unemployment. And what the CARES Act does is actually has expanded that in terms of what you potentially get from an unemployment perspective. Another thing to do is actually take stock, look at your balance sheet. So obviously we’ve been talking about the power of the emergency fund and being able to look at OK, what is your burn rate? How many months can you basically get by without any income? And then if we supplement this with some of the other incomes out there, how do we do this? But one of the big things that you now have access to that you didn’t have access to before were things like your retirement plans, IRAs, 401k’s, 403b’s. You can actually take distributions up to $100,000 in 2020. You have to take the distribution in 2020 from these IRAs and employer-sponsored plans, without penalty. So as long as you’ve been affected by the coronavirus — and this is a very broad interpretation — you either have to be diagnosed, have a spouse or dependent diagnosed, you’ve experienced adverse financial consequences as a result, you’re unable to work because you can’t get daycare, you own your own business and it had to close, very, very broad. You basically are exempt from the 10% penalty. So most people know that once you put money into an IRA, a 401k, once it hits that bucket, for you to get it out, it’s a 10% penalty to get those moneys out. That goes away. A lot of times, you had to withhold if you were taking money out of or rolling over a 401k, you had to withhold 20%. And the reason that they do this is people take that money out, and it’s recognized as income. And then when the tax bill comes due, they’re like, oh, I forgot that I have a $50,000 tax bill or a $20,000 tax bill. The withholding goes away. And you can actually — you can repay this back. So you could say, “Hey, I need this $100,000 today for 2020,” and then over the next three years, you can pay it back or not without penalty. So that’s another thing that you can do. The other thing that they also did is they enhanced 401k. So most 401k’s, 403b’s, have provisions for you to take money and basically for hardships. So they’ve kind of done some broad strokes here. So typically, the maximum that you can take from a 401k was $50,000. Now they doubled that to $100,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: Basically, it used to be that you could only take 50% of the vested balance. So if I had a $40,000 401k, I could only take $20,000 of that. Now it’s basically you can take 100% of what’s vested. So if I have $40,000, I could take all $40,000 up to a maximum of $100,000. And then the big thing here is when you take money from the 401k, you typically pay that back as part of your paycheck with an interest payment. All of this, all of those payments will be delayed for at least up to a year. So those assets on your balance sheet, when you’re looking at OK, how do I get through this? You do have some levers to pull. And obviously some of the things that we always talk about is the emergency fund, you could always basically put in your — or take out what you put into a Roth, that comes out without penalty. You know, I think the big thing that I always talk about is diversifying your income streams.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So you know, I think we as Americans, just people, we say, “OK, this is our paycheck,” and we self-cap our income. But especially now, and I often wonder like to me, the things I’m really interested coming out of the coronavirus is what are all the things that we see as problems or we’re just sitting around and like here’s a solution.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So it could be where a business idea is born out — typically, that takes a lot of ramp-up, so maybe it’s not now. But you know, big things like could you deliver for Amazon? I would do it in a second. I love to drive around, listen to stuff, that would be fine by me. Some people are like nope, don’t want to do that, I want to stay quarantined. But thinking of ways to diversify income is big. And then probably just do a bottom-up approach to your budget. Really look at that. You know, obviously, growing top-line income I think can have far ramifications. But looking at your budget and say, “OK, do I really need” — like my wife and I, we do cleaners once a month. They’re not coming to our house because they don’t want to get infected. So that’s out of the budget. But things like that that you can basically say, OK, is this something that I absolutely need to have? You can wipe out your student loan payment. A lot of banks are forgoing mortgages, so you can contact your bank and say, “Hey, coronavirus, no loan payment for the foreseeable future.” So there’s lots of different things like that that I think are big to kind of get us through this tough period. Tim, did I leave anything else out?

Tim Ulbrich: No, that’s really comprehensive. And I’m glad you talked about all the different levers you can pull. And I’m glad you started with unemployment claims because I think there is a stigma. I know it’s something I would struggle with. But I think we have to remember that this was passed for this specific reason. So if we have somebody on the call tonight who is having a financial hardship, has reduced hours, has lost their job, has been furloughed, whatever be the case, I think starting there — because the way I think about this is of all the things you talked about, in what order am I going to pull the levers, right? So the way I think I would think about this is if I can file for unemployment and because of the CARES Act, we see that there’s some extra provisions there with additional benefits from the state and it’s a longer time period, things like that, but if I can then know what I’m looking at in terms of unemployment and then rework my budget, then I kind of know what else do I need to do. Do I need to pull from the emergency fund? Do I need to put the mortgage payment on pause? I don’t have to worry about the student loan payment. Do I need to pull money from a 401k or a 403b or an IRA? But I think objectively, starting with what can you get in terms of replacing income? And then working backwards and identifying what other moves you can make to help in that. So Tim, talk us through — and you might have mentioned this. I just want to make sure that those are on — those that are on are tracking with me as well. If I were to pull or need to pull let’s say $40,000 from my 401k or 403b, you mentioned that that has to be in this year, 2020. Obviously, those are pre-tax contributions. So is that then I would assume just treated as taxable income this year? Can I spread it out? And how should I also be thinking about the tax implications of that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so one of the kind weird things or odd things about this but actually interesting is that you know, let’s take it the round number of $90,000 as an example. So if you can — say you take $90,000 out of your 401k. Now, you don’t get the 10% penalty, which is awesome. You get that cash immediately. So you don’t have to withhold anything. And then you have the eligibility repaid over three years if you want or not. But basically, you can recognize that income either all the $90,000 that you take out in 2020. So let’s pretend that I’m a service worker, and I make $30,000 this year. And I take $90,000 out. Now, I can basically recognize — so I basically am taxed on the $120,000 for 2020. Or I can basically spread out that adjustment between — or that distribution — across three years. So I could take $30,000 in 2020, $30,000 in 2021 and $30,000 in 2022. Now, this is where working with a savvy tax professional like our Paul Eichenberg might help this. But it’s either one or the other. So you can’t like — it’s either like spread it out evenly for three years, which probably more often than not, that makes the most sense if you can defer it out. Or if it’s a really bad year and you want to basically hey, maybe it’s $40,000 that you need, it makes sense to take it all in 2020 because you know, basically you’re shut down, you’re not making any income. Maybe it makes sense to do that. So it just depends on how you elected to do that. Another point about the unemployment that I will say is, you know, again, I kind of think about it kind of like social security. Like you pay into that over the course of your life. Same thing with unemployment. You pay into that. Some of the things that they did with the CARES Act is that the waiting period goes away. So before, you had to typically wait.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: Basically the federal government will cover the first week of unemployment. There’s a fund called the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance, which is typically if you don’t qualify for anything else, it’s typically for self-employed individuals or contractors. That’s available for you. They’ve actually plussed up — so like the regular state unemployment benefit is increased by $600 per week. Just to give you some context, the average, the typical unemployment check, is $385 per week.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, it was big news.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So it’s now like more than double the bonus on top of that. And you get this — and this was probably one of the big things that tied it up in the Congress.

Tim Ulbrich: Senate.

Tim Baker: The Senate, was because they thought that the benefit was too generous where it would disincentivize people from basically going out and looking for work. But they capped it at basically four months. But the extension of the overall benefits go 13 extra weeks. So again, you know, this is — right now, we’re in a time where like we’re cooped up, you know, maybe we’re feeling a little blue, maybe this half of unemployment, this shouldn’t — this doesn’t define you. This is not part of who you are.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Tim Baker: And even like businesses, we’re going to see businesses that are not going to be able to survive this. And it’s a shame because it’s not something that they necessarily did wrong. It’s just a systemic thing that came along, and I think the government is trying to do whatever they can to basically keep businesses afloat and keep people on payrolls and things like that. But this is not a poor reflection of you and what you’re doing. So I just want to make that point because that’s a real thing for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Great reminder. And I think this is also a good time to remind you, we talk about things like the CARES Act, and we’ll talk about the student loans here in a moment. Here you’re talking about unemployment and the additional $600 a week benefit and the timeline of that being up to four months. I think this is a good time to remind that you know, some of this may be extended. Time will tell. We don’t know. So what we know right now is what’s been passed. But I think we will continue to keep an eye out for discussions. There’s already discussions of a fourth stimulus type of package that is in the works that I was reading about this morning. So I think stay tuned. And if you’re not already part of the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you’ll join us as we’re trying to stay as up-to-date as we can on all of this information. So before we jump into student loans, Tim, I thought it would helpful since we talked about unemployment and the CARES Act extensively, let’s talk for a moment about the stimulus checks. Who’s getting them? Who’s not? Timeline? And what can people expect here? Because I think we’re going to have some people listening, many people perhaps, that won’t get these or will get a reduced amount. So I don’t want to spend a ton of time here, and this has probably gotten the most wide press compared to some of the other items. But let’s talk for a moment here before we take some questions and then transition into student loans.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so this is Section 2201, the recovery rebates to individuals. Now, the stats out there is that 90% of taxpayers should receive something. I’m not sure what percent or pharmacists will receive this, but essentially this is a credit against 2020 income taxes. So everyone basically has a starting amount and then it gets reduced based on your AGI, you Adjusted Gross Income. So what we use — so as broad strokes, basically it’s $1,200 for each individual or $2,400 for married couples and then $500 per child essentially under 17. So if they’re 17, they don’t get it. Basically, under 17. The phase-outs for this are basically if you’re married filing jointly, it’s $150,000. And then head of household is $112,500 AGI. And then all other filers is $75,000. So basically, the way that you calculate this is if you’re a single taxpayer and you have one kid, that’s $1,200 plus $500 for the child. So that’s a $1,700 refundable credit. If you’re a married couple with one child, you basically have $2,400 plus $500 is the $2,900. Now, you take that as the starting point and then you look at your AGI. So in that first example, if you made $65,000 as a single individual, then you would get 100% of that $1,700.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: If you made $76,000, which is $1,000 above the threshold, then your benefit would be reduced by I think it’s $50 for every $1,000. So in that case, it would be not $1,700. It would be $1,650.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: So the same thing with the married filing jointly, one kid, $2,400 for the couple, $500 for the child, that’s $2,900. If they made basically $151,000, it would basically be reduced by $50. So $2,850 instead of the $2,900. So you start with basically the family situation, then you apply the income, and then you reduce it as such. So for a lot of pharmacists, you know — and again, so the other caveat to this is they’re going to look at the last tax return on file. So if you are not a procrastinator or you filed your taxes early, good for you. They’re going to look at your 2019 return. If you haven’t filed your taxes or you’re like, hey, extension, more time to use, then they’re going to look at 2018. Now, at the end of the day, it will be basically be chewed up on the 2020 tax return. So they’re not going to claw anything back. So let’s pretend that your 2018-2019 income is lower than what it is today, you still get that rebate and they’re not going to claw that back. But let’s pretend that your 2018-2019 income is higher and you get furloughed, you might not get it today. And I would estimate checks will start coming — checks are deposited and will start coming in May. You might get it today, but you could get it when you file your 2020 taxes. Now, does that help you? No. It doesn’t necessarily help you today. But the idea is that in future tax returns, you’ll be indemnified essentially to that, to what you’re — so here’s an example. I’m not going to file my 2019 taxes anytime soon because of a lot of the changes that I had in my household, the business, that type of thing. So our son Liam was born last year. So he’s — to the IRS, he doesn’t really exist right now. So when we go to file for 2020, I expect a $500 credit for him.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So that’s an example. Now, there are some maybe thoughts about the ethics of this in terms of like, hey, should I file my 2019 because it will give me a better credit? The answer is yes. You should. Or should I wait to file? The answer is yes. That’s just good financial planning, it’s good sense. At the end of the day, this is tax money that they’re basically returning to you. So to me, you know, regardless of where you’re at, whether you are in a position where income is fine and stable, we don’t know that in the future. So to me is this is the system that’s there. It’s just like with taxes, what we say is we want to pay the least amount of taxes humanly possible. That’s legally. That’s legally possible. So we’re not going to pay more than that. So the same thing is that if you can get a better benefit, then you should go for that for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’re talking about legal tax strategies. So let’s be very clear on that.

Tim Baker: Exactly.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s an important point. So Tim Baker, when you’re throwing around terms like clawback, you’re not using pharmacy lingo like PBM clawbacks and other things.

Tim Baker: Yeah, sorry.

Tim Ulbrich: There will be no clawbacks here though, just to be clear.

Tim Baker: No clawbacks.

Tim Ulbrich: For those who are used to clawbacks. So Drew, let’s stop here and take a couple questions related to work uncertainty before we move onto student loans.

Drew: Sure, Tim. First question, will this Act allow for small business owners to file for unemployment when they typically would not qualify?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so that — exactly right. So typically as a small business owner, you don’t get into that party. But the Pandemic fund that I mentioned is typically going to be for those small business owners, those contractors, that wouldn’t otherwise qualify. So that’s the fund that they’re probably going to basically dip into. It’s called the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance program. It’s a federal program. And that’s, to me, that’s where I would definitely go.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I was thinking today, Tim Baker, about all of the people that — we talk about on the podcast all the time about side hustling, you know, whether it’s Airbnb, Rover, the list goes on and on. And how many of those are being impacted in a time like this? So it’s certainly something to consider. What else, Drew?

Drew: Thanks, guys. Another interesting question from an independent pharmacy owner. Do you guys have more insight into any assistance that may come in the future? For example, if their business is doing well right now, they’re showing an increase in revenue over the last few weeks. However, they could foresee a slump in the coming months, for example, if they’ve had patients who filled refills early or for 90 days. So therefore, they may need assistance in the future. What do you guys think about that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so actually, one of the changes in the bill — so there are some healthcare-related rules, and I’ll run through those really quickly. So there’s definition of medical expenses is expanded, specifically for HSAs and FSAs. So a lot of eligible medical expenses will now include over-the-counter meds. So that’s a big one. But one of the things that they talked about too is Part D recipients can request up to a 90-day supply. And it’s just a matter of kind of limiting seniors from basically having to go out and those type of things. Telehealth is another big thing that’s been temporary covered by HSA-eligible high-deductible plans. So as part of that, though, to go back to the kind of independent side, one of the major parts of this legislation, the CARES Act is the Paycheck Protection Program, which is essentially — it looks like free money in a lot of ways. So if you are a pharmacy owner out there and you’re like, hey, things are OK now but we could be affected — and actually, Tim, I don’t know if you saw this email. But you know, our bank, our business bank, actually sent us kind of an email about this that said, “Hey, you may be eligible. Check this out.”

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: And it basically outlined a lot of the big — so it’s basically, it’s guaranteed by the Small Business Administration and issued by SBA-approved lenders. You’ve got to apply for this type of loan by June 3. And the maximum duration of the loan is 10 years. So this is typically for a business that has less than 500 employees. You do have to basically in good faith certify that the loan is necessary due to uncertainty of current economic conditions caused by the coronavirus. Now that’s again a broad definition there. And I would say like if you are in the toilet paper or the hand sanitizer business, you should not be applying for this because that would be fraud. But the interesting part of this is that the max loan is the lesser of $10 million, or 2.5 times the average monthly payroll costs of the previous year. And the proceeds can be used for payroll, group health insurance premiums, salaries, rent, utilities. And 100% of that could be forgiven if it’s used during the first 8 weeks that you get the loan.

Tim Ulbrich: Which is crazy.

Tim Baker: And you don’t lay off employees. So you have to basically kind of have the same employees, you have to pay them more or less the same amount, but it’s pretty generous. And the rates for small business rates are typically higher. The rates, the maximum that you can be charged is 4%. The discharge debt is nontaxable. And those initial payments are going to be deferred for at least 6 if not 12 months. So I have an independent pharmacy owner that I was talking to earlier this week and he’s like, “Is this for life?” And I’m like, “I think so. But let me read up more about it.” Because potentially, again, it’s one of those things that’s uncertainty about this. And there’s a lot of businesses that you could probably chalk that up to now go apply for these loans, I think it’s a pain in the neck. So it’s something to consider though.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and get your pen ready I think to do the paperwork. But speaking of toilet paper companies, Tim Baker, I saw a toilet paper startup company I was reading about this morning that I thought was interesting. But I think on a serious note — and we actually were having this conversation before we jumped on this evening — I would encourage whoever asked that question or others that might be this would be impacting is to try to really, really intentionally self-assess, even if you’re not, again, at a good faith statement, even if you’re not impacted today, you know, as you look out in the future and trends and how that business will change, could you be heading in that direction where challenges may present themselves, payroll might be an issue. Or if you’re thinking ahead to the business, you know, that changes hiring or how you’re leveraging resources, I think really taking a step back to say, of course you want to be in good faith, but if there’s not impacts that are happening today that are significant, is that something that could be coming in the future if this continues? So Drew, how about one more and then we’ll transition to student loans.

Drew: Sure, guys. So if someone was unemployed before the CARES Act was passed, could they still have the increase to $600 a week?

Tim Ulbrich: I don’t know that question. My gut would assume yes, they would, but I don’t know the answer to that. Do you, Tim?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think yes. And again, part of this is just if you think about the administration of this to say like, you know, when — I’m pretty sure that — well, maybe it depends. I’m not going to say yes or no to that. That might be something we have to look at. So if you were unemployed before this was signed into law, how does that affect your unemployment? Let me try to find some answers to that. If that person could email us at [email protected], I’ll research and get back to you. That’s a good question.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I would like to think — maybe it’s half glass full — I’d like to think that they wouldn’t penalize somebody because of the timing of that.

Tim Baker: But I do know they were making a big deal about the actual date in which he signs. So it could basically be dated. That’s kind of the line, the demarkation.

Tim Ulbrich: That makes sense.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. Alright, let’s move to student loans, probably a lot to discuss here and it sounds like from Drew’s comment earlier, we have a lot of questions. So we talked a little bit about the CARES Act and student loans, but let’s dig in in more detail, Tim. You know, as I mentioned in the introduction, we had a lot of news around student loans, starting with the 60-day interest freeze to the 60-day no payment with the interest freeze and then obviously the big news that came as part of the CARES Act of no payments for six months with no interest that will accrue during that time. And that was really I think the big news on student loans. So talk to us a little bit about that news as well as what that means for people that are pursuing loan forgiveness and then which federal loans are included and what’s not included.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, the big news obviously, like you said, is that for federal student loan payments — so we’re not talking about your private refi’s. And this is really direct loans, so we’re not even really talking about FFEL loans or even Perkins loans or things like that.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right.

Tim Baker: We’re really talking about the direct loans that are out there. Automatically, you’re going to basically pay 0% interest effective March 13 to September 20 of this year. And then also, payments will be suspended automatically over the course of the time. Now, we’re still talking to clients and people that are saying like, hey, they’re not suspended. Student loan servicers, one, I think part of the — I’ll give them a little bit of grace because I think they’re understaffed right now because of everything that’s going on but also they’re just — they are notoriously poor at answering questions, responding to borrowers and that type of thing. So it could take a little bit of time for them to kind of get everything on board. But I looked at the FedLoan page as one of the big federal loan servicers, and they said if there is any delay, everything will be retroactively counted and things like that. So you know, typically the big ones are FedLoan, Navient, NelNet, Great Lakes, those are all federal loan providers. So required payments are suspended. And you don’t really have to do anything. And probably it’s better if you don’t do anything because I guarantee you if one person calls and they get one direction and then the next, you could call five minutes later and get a completely separate, different direction. So the big takeaway here is that, you know, from a federal student loan perspective, no interest, no payments until basically September 30. So I think the big thing is depending on where you’re at is to kind of look at, OK, as an example, I have an $800 payment. In most cases, you should not be paying that. We should be directing that elsewhere, which could be looking at plussing up the emergency fund a little bit more, paying down consumer debt or other high-interest debt, it could be invested. So be very, very intentional about how you want to direct that payment. Again, typically if we’re not, we see lifestyle creep and things like that. That $800 gets lost in the fold. So we want to make sure that we’re really intentional with that. Another big thing is that involuntarily debt collections will be basically put on hold and suspended. So if we have anybody out there that’s kind of in those dire straits, you’d have a little bit of reprieve there. If you’re in school, if we have students on here, I think the big thing that’s going to be different is basically you’re going to take all of your unsubsidized loans and they’re going to subsidized. So essentially for those months, you’ll basically not accrue any interest, which is a big deal because that bill is basically tacked on daily. I’m trying to think — now for, I mentioned for federal loans or for private loans and FFEL loans, you kind of got cut out of this deal. So this is one of the things that’s very unfortunate because typically the people that are trying to refinance are really trying to take a proactive approach to paying off their loans. So in the decision tree, it’s typically hey, is forgiveness on the table, whether it’s PSLF or non-PSLF. If it’s not, you’re like, “Hey, Tim, not cool. Don’t trust the federal or the forgiveness program,” which I think is a viable program, you then go to comparing your standard payment to a refi. And typically, refi rates have been so much better than what you get coming out of school, so it makes sense to basically shift over from the federal government to the private. Now you’re basically being penalized for taking a more proactive approach to paying off your loans whereas a forgiveness option or forgiveness play is more of a reactive approach, unfortunately. So you can consolidate loans. I think that if you consolidate them down, a FFEL loan, so this is federal loans that aren’t part of this, you can consolidate a FFEL or even a Perkins loan down and potentially get some type of reprieve on that. Typically when you do that, if you are looking at a forgiveness option — actually, you probably want to not look at that unless you can pick out those loans specifically. That can be a big problem. I think those are the main talking points.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, just to reiterate some of the things you mentioned. I think this is huge news, especially for those that may be hearing this for the first, second or even third time I mean, for that matter. No payments on qualifying federal loans until September 30. Again, who knows? This may or may not be extended. Time will tell. No interest that accrues during the interim. And this will count towards loan forgiveness. So for the client you mentioned earlier that has two months left of PSLF, they’re getting a free ride on the last two payments, huh?

Tim Baker: Well, I told her, I was like, I think that you paid your last student loan payment. And she had the biggest smile ever.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. That’s really cool.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So if somebody does make a payment — and I’m grateful for what you said about really taking a step back and being strategic — obviously would then just go toward directly to the principal, right?

Tim Baker: Yes, correct. Now, according to like FedLoan, they would basically figure out a way to like make you hold so you get that full benefit. I have no idea, and I have very little confidence that will actually happen, so I think one of the questions is, how do I know that if my payments count toward PSLF, I would be tracking them because one of the — although I’ve said it time and time again, I think PSLF is a very viable strategy and I think it does have legs despite the kind of national news about it, you can’t argue with the math. But the administration of this is awful, in my opinion. The Department of Education is supposed to be basically providing oversight for FedLoan, and you know, by and large, they bumbled that program. So there’s lots of handholding, there’s lots of uncertainty around it, but at the end of the day, you have to basically cross your t’s and dot your i’s, just make sure that you’re babysitting them, so to speak. So you know, I think running — one of the things you could potentially do is run an NSLDS report, which is just basically the text document that basically shows the birth to the death of the loan. So basically a month-by-month description. So run that kind of now and then run it afterwards and kind of just see where you’re at in terms of your overall PSLF count. I think that’s what I would do.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, this will as we get through this storm and we talk about PSLF in the future, I think this will be another example point just like last year when they added some funding to the program to help make up for some borrowers that ran into issues, especially those first couple years of applying for forgiveness. I think this will be another tick in the column of you know, it looks pretty good for the longevity of PSLF or the grandfathering of borrowers that are currently there. So does this — Tim, my question is, you know, for those that are or were thinking about refinance, does this effectively make refinance a moot point for this six-month period?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, I guess there could be certain like instances where you can — because I think one of the things that I am kind of concerned about is some of these companies that are offering refi can’t stay solvent because eventually, effectively, you wiped away a lot of their market because of the 0%. So there’s going to be a lot less people jumping from the federal to the private. Now, I guess you could have some people that go from a private to a private refi.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: So it’s like hey, I have this 5%, I can get a 3.25%. That’s a little bit better. But I think it’s like 90% — isn’t it like 90% of loans are federal loans or something else?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’ve seen that tick up in rates.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Yeah, so the rates — that’s the other thing. Rates have gone up. So and they’ve been yo-yoing. I wouldn’t be surprised if they went back down.

Tim Ulbrich: Agreed.

Tim Baker: So you know, if I could get in, I would probably have to be somewhat through the benefit period. But if I’m 3-4 months in and I can get a rate that’s really, really aggressive, you know, maybe like 2%, I might consider that as an option just to kind of lock that in. But yeah, I mean, I think it really doesn’t make a whole lot of sense to leave that, to leave the federal system. And I think the other thing to kind of note is the federal loans, they are more generous when it comes to like hardships and things like that because they’re backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. taxpayer where some of these other companies are not. They don’t have that bank account standing behind them. So they can’t be as generous with them. Now, a lot of them have matched a lot of the kind of the forgiveness upon death and disability and they will work with you on a hardship. And I would say if you do have private loans and you can’t make the payments, contact the Earnest, CommonBond, Credible, whoever it is, and say, “What can we do?” And a lot of times, they will work with you. But they’re also, they’re kind of in dire straits as well. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And you know, we talk a lot about on the podcast and the blog on the pros and cons of refinance. So I’m going to have to update my slides in the future, you know, something we could have never predicted, but a COVID-19-like situation where you have something like six months of federal loan payments being paused and 0% interest. I could not have ever predicted this happening. So — and just to add on your comment, Tim, before we take questions, I think it’s a really important reminder that we certainly want to extend them some grace in this moment where they’re dealing with a lot as well, but the loan servicing companies — we even have an example today from one of our Certified Financial Planners, Robert Lopez, who was on the phone with them and I think in his words was really after being on hold, was less than helpful in their response. And I think that can happen in terms of incorrect information or they’re overwhelmed. And we’ve heard that before. This is not the first time. So making sure that what you hear is lining up with other things you’ve heard or if you think, you know, that doesn’t right, making sure you’re fact-checking that.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and the thing that he said to me when I talked to him about it was like, yeah, and she was just very, very confident in her answer but completely wrong, which is — that’s the problem because it’s not like the student loans are a black-and-white issue. There’s lots of nuance and intricacies and when you’re calling up someone on such a big thing, we’re talking potentially six figures of debt, you want to walk away like feeling confident that the advice or the counsel that that person on the other line gave you was sound. And more often than not, it’s just not. And it’s not necessarily the fault of the person, it’s just that they’re not trained very well. And that’s a shame because I think we’re seeing — you know, and that’s one of the bad publicity angles is like hey, I was told this and it was completely something different, you know?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So that’s why I think sometimes working with someone to help cross t’s and dot i’s and get you to that finish line is really, really important because there’s just a lot of potential hoops to jump through. And it’s not just — you know, there’s so many different — even like the tax ramifications with student loans, that’s one of the reasons that we started doing taxes at YFP is like I was tired of basically referring people out to professionals that had no idea how to handle the taxes. So I’m like, we have to do it in-house. And that’s what we do.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Great stuff, Tim Baker, as always. So Drew, you had mentioned earlier lots of questions around student loans, so let’s tackle a handful of those.

Drew: Alright. So the first question, would you consider reconsolidating federal loans for a low rate? Or wait until after September? What if this rate is only offered over the next month?

Tim Baker: So I think we’re kind of conflating two issues if I’m using that word correctly. So consolidation or reconsolidation and refinance are completely separate things. So when you consolidate, when you consolidate your loans, you’re basically taking two or more federal loans, so think Direct Plus, Direct Unsubsidized, Direct Stafford Subsidized, and you’re basically shrinking those down into really one or two loans, more than likely two. You have a Direct Consolidation Unsubsidized loan, and a Direct Consolidation Subsidized loan. The reason that you do consolidation is two reasons: One is for convenience. So you guys know as pharmacists, you have a crapton of loans that are pages long. If you look at your credit report, it’s a mess because every basically disbursement is a record in your credit report. So you do it kind of for ease of use, for convenience. The second reason that you do it is to kind of solve the square peg, round hole. So like we mentioned, some of those FFEL loans and some of those other loans that are out there that a little bit older, they don’t qualify for some of those income-driven plans that are out there that then allow you to be forgiven, to get into some of the forgiveness programs. So it’s basically consolidate those down and then get into those IBR, ICR, PAYE or in a Revised Pay As You Earn. Now, the key here is that you’re just taking a weighted balance in interest rate. So you’re not getting any better terms or deals or anything like that. So if you had, you know, 6% and 5% and 4%, they’d just weight those together and now your new rate is 5.4% as an example. So when you — so that’s consolidation. When you refinance, you’re basically saying, deuces, federal government. Thanks for lending me the money, but I’m going to take my income, my credit score, my payment history, and I’m going to go out to the Credibles of the world, some of these other companies, and I’m going to try to find a better deal, a better terms for myself. So you know, I use kind of 6% as the line of demarkation. So anything higher than 6% on your federal loans is typically high. Anything low is typically — lower than that is typically pretty good. But if you have an average weighted interest rate of 5.8%, at a 10-year, that’s your default, a 10-year standard repayment, you can even today with the rates that are out there, you can beat 5.8%, so that’s where you would do an apples-to-apples comparison to a 10-year with a Credible or a CommonBond or something like that. You might get 4.9%. I’m just making up rates right now. So you would say, OK, better terms, lower payment, that type of thing. So to answer your question, do I think — so those are really the big differences. Now, the big thing to remember is that once you go from the federal to the private, there’s no going back. So that’s why a lot — I was kind of bemoaning the fact that people that have made that decision to say, “Thanks, federal government, it’s been real. Thanks for loaning me the money, I’m going to take it from here and go to a private company,” they’re kind of left in the dark a little bit because there’s no relief for them. So and they can’t go back. So they can’t say, “Psych. Just kidding. Takebacksies, let me go back to the federal government and get my relief.” So with regard to the rates, you know, rates are a little bit higher than they were a couple weeks ago. I would imagine that they’re going to come down. I think they’re going to have to just to be somewhat competitive with the government. But what the loan companies now are struggling with is not the fact that the fed has lower rates. It’s more about if I, Tim Ulbrich, if I let you refinance and now you’re making payments to me, the Baker Private Refi company, can I trust that you’re actually going to be employed to pay this back? And by the way, like I don’t have a huge cash reserve like the federal government that I can just rely on. So that’s why there was such a big flood of refis and these companies were like, whoa, like this is a problem and rates started to creep back up. And I think they’ll have to go back down just to incentivize, especially towards the end of that period, that September grace period, relief period, but yeah. So those are big, big differences we’re talking about. And sometimes those are used interchangeably, and they shouldn’t be. But a very common issue.

Drew: Awesome, guys. Should the student loan payments continue and just go 100% toward principal on the student loans during this time? Are federal Grad PLUS loans included?

Tim Baker: So the answer to the second question is yes. Grad PLUS loans are included. The answer to the first question is, typically no. So most of the time, if you are basically going through this strategy — if you selected your strategy appropriately, we’ll say, if you are in the federal system today, it’s really — the main reason is because you’re trying to seek some type of forgiveness option. So in that case, in that case, you should not pay a dollar more than you need to. The flag that you need to fly is you want to pay the least amount as humanly to maximize your forgiveness. So you’re going to take full advantage of that payment that would otherwise go there and basically direct that elsewhere.

Tim Ulbrich: And you get your forgiveness credit.

Tim Baker: Correct. Yeah, and get that month counted. Anytime that you can have basically a $0 payment, like a $0 interest payment, the math says basically money is a finite resource, use that money elsewhere. Now, this is kind of an emotional thing. Now, so the reason that I say most people that are in a federal payment is typically because they’re seeking forgiveness. You could be looking at me and saying, “Well, I’m in the federal program and I’m not seeking forgiveness.” So the reason I say that is because it makes sense from a math perspective to go outside — because of where rates have been for the last however many years — it makes sense to go out to a private company and get a better rate. Now, 10 years ago, a lot of these companies — like the student loan refi game was newer and when I was taught about student loans, you would never leave the federal system because the federal system, there’s a lot of these protections, forgive upon death and disability. But because of students loans are a $1.5 trillion issue, a lot of these companies have kind of risen to the same benefits that the federal government has. So now they can incentivize you to say, “Come over here and pay us the interest over the federal government.” So the question is should I pay the money back? I would say no unless your goal is to basically pay them off as quickly as possible. And if that’s true, then you probably should have refinanced years ago anyway. If that’s still true and you’re still in the federal system, I would say, yeah, you can pay it off. I would probably still direct that money elsewhere and then probably refinance because more than often, more often than not, you can get a better rate. Now, there are sometimes I come across loans that are like 2% and 3%. You know, if you are one of those people, don’t listen to me because I think you’re in the right spot. So if you are in a 2% or 3%, oftentimes, again, you’re like, alright, well I’d rather pay off my car loan that’s 5% or that credit card that I have that’s whatever percent. So those are some of the things you just have to weigh.

Tim Ulbrich: And if I could add to that, Tim, I think the only exception I think of here is if somebody knows themselves well enough that that money is going to be diverted elsewhere through kind of the typical lifestyle creep thing. If you know yourself well enough and you have that self-awareness, I think that might be the exception where you say, I’m going to keep making payments because momentum is really important. But the way I think about this is let’s say I’m making $1,500 a month payment let’s say on the standard default federal system. I think about that. If I didn’t have to make that payment, how would I best leverage $1,500 a month across my financial plan? And this is where we go back and we talk about this all the time on the podcast. So not just looking at one segment of your financial plan. So what does your emergency fund look like? What does the consumer debt look like? What investment opportunities exist? Are you not taking advantage of employer match in retirement, that type of situation? So you know, if you look at all those, more often than not I think what you’re really referring to is more often than not, if not almost always, you’re probably going to find an opportunity where that money could be leveraged elsewhere, at least for the short term when you have this 0% interest for six months.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I’ll give you an example. I was talking to a pharmacist in Washington. He’s married. He’s going for PSLF. I forget how much he’s paying per month. But he has a little ways to go with the emergency fund. He has a car — one of his car loans is 5-6%. So his question is, should I put money into the emergency fund? I’m like, yes, and probably focus on the car loan. And you know, if you think about it, these loan payments can be 8 — and especially if you’re married — it can be thousands and thousands of dollars. I mean, one, two, three months of that can go huge right into an emergency fund. Like I think about how much money my wife and I basically save into our Ally accounts for different purposes. You know, it’s about $1,500 a month after we’re putting money into 401ks and IRAs and things like that, 529 accounts for our kids. But you know, it’s going into our Mexico fund or it’s going into our home maintenance fund or whatever that looks like. But if I could basically double that for this amount of months, like that would be awesome. And then the other side of that is once you have your savings plan in place, that’s when you can really get dangerous with your investments. And sometimes we put the cart before the horse. So I work with a lot of pharmacists that are like credit card debt, student loan payments are kind of all over the place, and then they have like a Robinhood account. And I get — I know why we do that. It’s because we’re interested and we want to learn about investments, but those are — we’re three or four steps ahead where we probably shouldn’t be directing money into a taxable account. We should be focused on some of these steps 1-8 type of thing. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So Drew, I think we have time for probably one more question before we wrap up for the evening.

Drew: Awesome. So guys, for future borrowers of federal loans, do you think the interest rate will be higher after COVID-19 to make up for money lost?

Tim Ulbrich: Ooh, that’s a good question. You know, how will this get paid back and what impact will that have on future interest rates on federal loans? What do you think, Tim?

Tim Baker: I don’t think so. You know, I think rates for student loans have been pretty high with regard to like the federal side of things. That’s not uncommon for me to see. I mean, back — you know, if I’m working with people in their 40s and 50s, sometimes they have loans that are like 2% and I’m like, this is awesome. Because most of the time, I see 20-somethings, 30-somethings, that could be north of 7% for federal loans. And for pharmacists, those Grad PLUS loans, those add up. So and I think there is a little bit of a cry of like the government profiting on the backs of students, that type of thing. It is an unsecured debt, but it doesn’t ever go away. So like you can’t discharge student debt in bankruptcy, so it’s pretty secure in terms of like if you have student loans and you’re collecting social security, they’ll garnish that stuff. So that’s one of the problems with student loans is you can’t get away from them. So I don’t know if we see a big spike in rates after the fact. I mean, I could see the opposite, that they keep them low. But you know, who knows? You know, who knows what’s going to happen? We could see kind of a action-reaction type of thing with regard to that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s a really good question. You know, this reminds me to a talking point when we talk about PSLF. We need to remember that this is a — student loans are $1.5 trillion problem that are gaining a lot of momentum politically. And if you’ve watched any of the debates this season, this is an indicator as well as what we saw as the support in the CARES Act, I think we’re going to see more of that going through the election year. So you know, in theory, of course they could. But I don’t think it’s a very popular decision right now for a lot of the flack that they take in in terms of the rising student loan debt and the impact interest rates have had. So too soon to say, but I certainly don’t think it would be a popular decision.

Tim Baker: Yeah, but I mean, but to play devil’s advocate on the other side of the aisle is you know, with Trump, he’s basically proposing to get rid of it, which again, I saw some questions get in, come in like hey, is this really a viable thing? And I think the answer is still yes despite that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: Because I still bet on the status quo versus a big change. And that’s either for like mass forgiveness or elimination. So it’s another issue where our country is very, very polarized over one issue. So but I think, again, to kind of reassure the PSLF-ers out there is that every — basically when this was enacted by President George W. Bush in 2007, every president and Congress since then has talked about getting rid of it or capping it. And it’s still here. And all of the documents and legislation, proposed legislation, to do this talks about future borrowers. So if you’re a student and you’re going to graduate in 2022, I don’t know. Maybe it will be there, maybe it won’t. But if you’re a year into PSLF and you’re in the program and you’re basically filled out the employment certification form, I think that you’re going to be fine. I would imagine if and when they ever do get rid of this, let’s pretend it’s January 1, 2025, then those people that are going to be into it — so if you’re in it December 31, 2024, your loans are going to be forgiven basically 10 years from then, essentially is what the thought is. So I think at least it’ll be grandfathered in. But the press on it is terrible. But I think it will get better.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I agree. And for those that want to learn more about this topic, we’ve covered it on the podcast a few different times. Episode 018, we talked about the benefits of PSLF. 078, we talked about is it a waste? And that was when the news had come out about 99% of borrowers or applicants of PSLF being denied. And then 114, most recently, we talked about the presidential candidates at the time predominantly was Elizabeth Warren and Bernie Sanders’ take on debt cancellation and forgiveness. So for those that had a question this evening that we did not get to, couple options I would throw out to you. One, if you aren’t already with us in the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you’ll join there. We’ve got a community that’s very active and responsive. You can throw your question out there. As well as we have a weekly segment we do on the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast called Ask a YFP CFP where we do just like we’re doing here, question from a member of our community teed up for Tim Baker, our financial planner, to answer that question. You can submit your question by going to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/askYFP. So thank you so much to everybody who attended. Really, really appreciate your engagement throughout the evening. I appreciate you all taking the time to come onto the webinar tonight. I want to thank Tim Baker again for his time as well, as well as APhA for making this session possible. Have a great rest of your evening.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 145: How Samm Built DocStation to Increase Value-Based Care


How Samm Built DocStation to Increase Value-Based Care

Samm Anderegg is on a mission to fix healthcare through his company DocStation. DocStation a software platform for healthcare teams, enabling pharmacists to provide value-based care to patients. Samm talks about his shift from a traditional career path to starting his own company and how his work with DocStation aligns with his vision for the future of pharmacy practice.

About Today’s Guest

Samm Anderegg is Chief Executive Officer at DocStation, a software platform for healthcare teams, enabling pharmacists to provide value-based care to patients. After graduating with distinction from the University of Iowa College of Pharmacy, he completed post-graduate residency training and a combined Master’s degree program specializing in Health-System Pharmacy Administration at the University of Kansas. Anderegg spent two years working in oncology and ambulatory care management at Augusta University Health System in Georgia before founding DocStation.

Summary

Samm Anderegg is the CEO of DocStation, a software platform for healthcare teams that enables pharmacists to provide value-based care to patients. After graduating with distinction from the University of Iowa College of Pharmacy, he completed post-graduate residency training and a combined Master’s degree program specializing in Health-System Pharmacy Administration at the University of Kansas. Samm spent two years working in oncology and ambulatory care management at Augusta University Health System in Georgia before founding DocStation.

While he was working at Augusta University Health System, Samm saw that there were a lot of barriers to do things and that it was hard to justify the value of pharmacists and their services. He saw this as an opportunity to build a tool for pharmacists from the ground up and decided to leave his secure job to focus on his passion.

Before quitting, Samm had to assess his financial risk as he’d be leaving a six-figure salary behind and suddenly not have an income. He knew that he could eliminate some of his expenses, make minimum payments on his student loans and use his savings if needed. Luckily, he was able to get paid hourly for an IT job he’d been doing project work for which gave him the income he needed to live.

Samm found Josh, a software engineer, who became the other half of DocStation. Together they created a care management platform and electronic record system built for pharmacists. As the profession of pharmacy is changing, Samm knew that a single record system was needed to bring pharmacists into this new age. Now, it’s a tool for value-based care connecting health plans to pharmacists so they can be paid for their services.

DocStation is currently used in the Midwest across 7 states with 300 pharmacies, 700 pharmacy users, 1 major health plan and has 32,000 patients.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. It’s a pleasure to welcome onto the show Samm Anderegg, CEO of DocStation. Samm, excited to have you on the show. Welcome.

Samm Anderegg: Tim, thanks so much for allowing me to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. So let’s start off and talk a little bit about your career path into pharmacy, why you went into pharmacy, and ultimately why you decided to go on and complete what is known as a fairly intensive training path of a PGY1-PGY2 combined MS in healthcare administration.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, it started really simple. Grew up in small town Iowa and had friends and family that worked in my small hometown and had a cousin that flew the coop and went to university and got into pharmacy. And so I was a younger cousin, I looked up to all my older cousins, and you know, I was very interested in math and science. And I wanted to put that to use, so I think the big thing is, you know, knowing that you want to be interacting and helping people in the most simple sense and how do you make a career or profession out of that? And went to the University of Iowa, kind of debated between medicine and pharmacy but ultimately chose pharmacy and I’m sure glad I did it.

Tim Ulbrich: So then you make the decision and a program that’s near and dear to my heart, I direct this program at Ohio State, the combined PGY1-PGY2 MS degree, obviously a very niched, focused pathway, very intensive. You know, you’re full-time resident, full-time student. So there certainly is some strategic decisions that go into making that move. So what was it that drew you into that focus of administrative pharmacy training?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, I think as you journey down this path that is your career, you’re constantly checking in with yourself and asking yourself, you know, what do you want to be when you grow up? And after I made that hurdle into pharmacy, it was then, you know, how can I blend my interest in what I believe that my skill set is to be fulfilled in my career? And you know, originally I thought being like in a primary care clinic and taking care of patients and building those relationships would be the way to go, but I realized that you can make a larger impact on a greater scale, be a little bit more creative, which I felt like — or what I held important — you could do that in an administrative role or a management role as the leader. And you know, I had some really great mentors at the University of Iowa that directed me to these administrative residencies, and I knew it was going to be a rough two years, but I’m a glutton for punishment, so I was a little bit excited about that as well. So that led me down the path and again, it’s just one of those decisions that you make along the way and wanted to keep myself versatile, so that’s the route I took.

Tim Ulbrich: So talk us through the work that you did after completing the combined residency and MS but before DocStation. So we’ll get there in a little bit about how you started that, what the work is you’re doing there. But what happened in between after you finished up the administrative training?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, I think, you know, again, I wasn’t quite sure what I wanted to be when I grew up, even after residency, right? And so I was looking for full-time positions in which I could, you know, lead a team, but the responsibilities were broad, meaning they weren’t specialized in necessarily operations or clinical management. And so I took a service line job. It was at the Medical College of Georgia. I was one manager on a team of five others with a director. And so a large amount of responsibilities, had about 18 FTEs. And you know, I was curious, I wanted to build things, create things, and really make an impact in that first job. And it was a great fit for me.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So eight years of training, so your pre-pharmacy, your pharmacy work, your administrative residency two years plus the MS degree, several years of experience, and then you make the decision that you’re going to walk away from that and start your own, start your own company. And that, of course, would be the work that you’re doing with DocStation. So tell us a little bit about that decision and how you’re able to reconcile walking away from I guess what you could say is somewhat something known and secure to then starting your own company.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, it’s a great question. I think, you know, when I made the decision on the first job, again, going back to that creativity piece and the ability to really build things, so the job was great for the first like two and a half years is how long I lasted there. Learned a lot, implemented a lot, but I didn’t realize how much that creativity was important to me. And so after you get quite a few things done, you start getting — you start pulling back the layers of the onion and realizing that there are a lot of barriers, you know? You cross quite a few in those first two and a half years and build a lot of great relationships, but there’s some just political, structural, operational barriers to be able to do new things like if you want to implement a new software or if you want to hire more FTEs, you know the ROI is there, but it’s not just a matter of convincing someone or showing them value, it’s things that are out of your scope of influence. So I was a little frustrated by that and I think what it came down to is we were trying to implement clinical services in the ambulatory care. And you know, built proposals, submitted them one year after the next, but what I realized is it’s really hard to justify that value. And looking around for all the like different clinical tools, pharmacy documentation tools that were able to do that, there just weren’t any. And so going back to that creative piece, I was like, you know, I’ve learned a little bit, enough, throughout my career to know that there’s an opportunity here to build a tool for pharmacists from the ground up. It sounds crazy when you say that if you’re in a position to be a manager, but the more you keep thinking about it, right, and I’m sitting here burned out in my job a little bit, working hard, still enjoying it but knowing that I don’t want to do it for the next 20 years of my life. So I spent a lot of time thinking and debating, but ultimately it just becomes more and more real the more you think about it. And when you look at the other people that have started companies, you know, they’re just like you and I. They’re just regular people. They were just willing to take that risk. And so then it became analyzing the risk and the financial piece, how do I actually do this? So you know, I kind of went from there and jumped off the ledge.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about that for a moment before I jump into exactly what is DocStation, what’s the problem you’re trying to solve with that, but talk us through, talk our listeners through how you did analyze that risk. I think that’s something that often, people are thinking about as oh, maybe I’ve got a great idea or I see people like Samm doing some cool stuff, but I can’t imagine walking away from my known six-figure job or I’ve got lots of student loan debt, got all these issues to deal with. So how did you walk through that risk and really try to objectively evaluate what the risk and the opportunity was?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, so I think even before I got to that point, it was making sure I found something that I was extremely passionate about, right? It hit all of my boxes like the technology piece, the creativity piece, the leadership piece and really building something, creating something out of nothing. I was extremely motivated to try this out at the beginning, right? And it’s, you know, the risk at that point is really just time risks. So I was working a full-time job, and I would go home in the evenings — you know, eat dinner, throw something in the microwave really quick, and then spend the next five or six hours just reading and listening to podcasts and trying to absorb as much information as possible, building out financial models, like whatever I could do to validate whether this was going to be a viable business or not. And you know, as that progressed, that got into a couple months’ worth of time where I was like running on no sleep basically to the point where I knew there was an opportunity there, it was just a matter of whether I wanted to take that next step of risk and ultimately decided that if I wanted to, what would I need to change? And I just needed to create more time. I needed to create more time for myself and really, the only way to do that was to eliminate those 40-60 hours a week that was my full-time job as a pharmacy manager. So you know, analyzed how I would do that and happy to kind of walk through those steps as well. I know a lot of people have ideas. It’s like, how do I actually put this into action? But the first thing is the risk of time. And that’s a good test to make sure that you are passionate about it if you’re willing to stay up until 2, 3 in the morning doing those things because you love it so much.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m so glad you said that too because I think that’s a common theme. I know I felt it when I was starting the work with YFP, but you hear it so often among business owners that are working full-time and then they start their own company simultaneously is that they will talk about it as if you hear the hours and you’re like, oh my gosh, it’s exhausting. But that person is so passionate about the idea that they don’t see that same level of exhaustion. You know, they’re so eager to learn and so eager to jump in and really see is this viable and how do I learn more about the industry and what’s happening? Talk me through more of the financial risk. You mentioned the time piece. I hear you there. But I’m guessing many are listening saying, you know, “How do I go from $120,000 to nothing?” You know, we know many business owners as you start, obviously you’re investing a lot back in the business. How did you assess the actual financial risks and what you might need to change, you know, if anything, to make that a reality?

Samm Anderegg: Yep. So I think I was about two and a half years into my job, so I was two and a half years into being used to that type of salary, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Samm Anderegg: And you know, I definitely like spent money to travel and do things like that, but I didn’t build everything into my day-to-day life where it would be really hard to untangle all of that stuff. It’s still hard, don’t get me wrong. It’s hard for anyone to do that, but what I — I looked at my savings account, how much of an emergency fund did I really have left and how much did I think, how long did I think that that would last? I looked at basically my primary income going to $0, so how do I make up — like what is it that I need to cover the bare minimum, right? What costs can I cut? It was really like a full-on slash of everything. I discontinued all my subscriptions, I eliminated my rent and figured, OK, I could stay with some friends for a little while while I figure this out. I put my student loans down to minimum payments. I was paying more than double what I owed. So did that exercise and then came up with a number, a monthly number that I needed to make up. And what I didn’t mention in my background is, you know, since like about 2010, I was involved in health IT, specifically on the pharmacy side. And so it started off as a project and eventually grew into through residency, I worked on this project. And then when I took that first job, they started paying me a little bit hourly for my expertise I had developed over the last three years, so there was work there. So an opportunity to do more hours and again, I was working on my own thing and full-time job, so I didn’t really have any time to dedicate to that. But that was an opportunity. I just basically said, “Hey, if you need me to do this, here’s how much I need per month,” and was able to negotiate that. So and you know, that was kind of like an opportunity and timing type thing. But I think, you know, whatever you’re doing, you’re trying to figure out any way you can make up that income, whether it’s passive income, whether it’s if you’re partner is willing to help you out in the meantime, if you want to start building up that savings account, that emergency fund early on, you know, lots of different options. It just depends on your situation. And that was mine.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think if I could add there too, Samm — I don’t know if you felt much of this — I know for me and a conversation my wife and I often have and really finding value in talking to other people because when you’re in it, it’s hard to see it. But I think often, I project the risk to be greater than it really is. And when you take a step back and you think about, OK, your training, if things were to fall flat in 6 or 12 months, it’s not like you’re not going to have options. You’ve got a network, you’ve got lots of training, right? So really taking a step back to say, not only for your individual financial plan what is true risk, but also career-wise, you know, play out the worst case scenario. And then if that’s the worst thing that could happen, which is likely to be unimaginable, OK, anything else, what’s really the risk that’s associated with that? One question I have for you, when you talked about coming home in the evenings and spending 5-6 hours, you know, really learning more about the business side, doing some modeling, how much of that learning was industry-specific to the area that you wanted to do with DocStation, and how much of it was more in kind of the business side of it and starting up a business and all that was entailed in doing that?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, none of it was industry-specific or pharmacy-specific, even healthcare-specific. And you know, you kind of start searching to see if there’s anyone out there talking about that in our particular field, but there’s just really not. And I thought, you know, when I first — a little bit disappointed at first, but then you realize that if you’re going to make this work for healthcare, for pharmacy or whatever, it’s industry-agnostic. Building a business, building a startup, there are different rules that you have to play by. And I think it’s better to learn from people that have done it in different industries and then figure out how that applies to healthcare and to pharmacy. And there are some nuances in the healthcare space that don’t apply to social media marketing, e-commerce and things like that. But those are the little things that you pick up along the way and fit into your puzzle as you go forward.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about and transition to DocStation. What is it? Why is it important? And what’s the problem that you’re trying to solve with DocStation?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, so DocStation is a care management platform or an Electronic Health Record built for pharmacists. The big thing that we’re trying to do is in the community pharmacy space, you know, the business model for the last dozens of years, decades, right, has been built on dispensing prescriptions and the administrative fees that come along with that and the margin that we make on the actual product. And just within the last two or three years, extreme pressure that is putting that at risk, putting pharmacies at risk. And so, I don’t know, I just kind of saw that, you know, you see every other product that has the ability to be shipped, delivered to people’s door in two days, so what’s going to happen to our profession? And so you know, I looked at community pharmacy, there’s really no one, clinical record or EHR system that folks use that’s built specifically to bring pharmacy to the new age and the clinical age, and that was the gap that I was trying to fill. And so I experimented with a lot of different ways to get started. Like the main thing is like, how are you going to bring in money for this business, right? Where’s your revenue going to come from? And thought pharmacies at first, but you know, the more you look at the market, the more you look at healthcare outside of pharmacy. Everything is moving to value-based care.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Samm Anderegg: And the folks that are going to make the most money in that type of equation are the health plans. They’re going to have the most value from that, right? And so we began to talk to health plans about that. And so the idea, the product itself, has evolved over time. You know, it started as like an EHR you sell to pharmacists as like a subscription fee. And now, it’s really a tool for value-based care or value-based pharmacy, connecting health plans directly with pharmacies to facilitate value-based care models.

Tim Ulbrich: So help our listeners understand how that differentiates from others that have been in the space for awhile. So I remember wrapping up residency in 2008. Here in Ohio, we had a big Medicaid MTM contract that came to be, lots of excitement around community pharmacists, community pharmacies getting involved in Medication Therapy Management services, lots of frustrations that were also happening because the caseload really wasn’t significant enough at the time — obviously, a lot has changed — significant enough at the time to be able to efficiently operationalize it in a store. So you saw these models evolving to where you’d have one clinical pharmacist going around to multiple stores trying to do these cases. Is it really viable? Is it something you can justify continuing? So the MTM delivery and a care platform at the community pharmacy has been around for awhile. It certainly has its challenges. So what is the work that you’re doing at DocStation? How does it differ from those existing platforms?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, I think going back to how is pharmacy unique, right? You mentioned MTM. Because we have this burden, and now I’m seeing it as an opportunity that we haven’t been classified as providers under the Social Security Act, you know, we didn’t fall down the typical path that physicians at hospitals did, meaning billing fee for service CPT codes.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Samm Anderegg: So we have been fighting tooth and nail for any sort of reimbursement for clinical services. And we’ve been very resourceful, so part of Medicare Part D passing was MTM was mandated, right? But MTM is a specific segment or specific way that pharmacists can get paid for services, and it’s wildly different than billing a CPT code for chronic care management. And that’s also wildly different from contracting directly with an outpatient physician’s office to help them improve quality measures. So you mentioned the big thing was how do we get our caseload up to make this actually a viable business for me to open a practice, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yep, yep.

Samm Anderegg: And so our belief is that if you build a tool that’s robust enough to incorporate all these different clinical revenue opportunities, and you take all of the administrative burden away, you leave the pharmacist with the simple message of take care of the patient and you’ll get paid. You’ll get paid enough to have a stable income, provide for your family, and if you’re ambitious, you know, build a large clinical practice out of it. And so that’s what we’re aiming to do and that’s why I believe that we’re different.

Tim Ulbrich: So what is holding this back from scaling? You know, I feel like one of the things that I’ve always struggled with thinking through the evolution of the community pharmacist’s role beyond the dispensing prescriptions is we seem to have pockets and pilots and areas of success, but we have yet to really see something scale. So in your world, what is preventing that from happening? And you know, is this a solution that can help that scaling happen?

Samm Anderegg: Great question. Well, getting into it, people told me this a million times. Software takes a heck of a lot longer to build than you think it’s going to, right? And that’s true. But regardless, healthcare and pharmacy and all of the different segments or ways to get reimbursed are incredibly complex, like way more complex than really any other industry. And that’s one of those unique things about healthcare. It would take two or three years to build out a clinical billing tool that works really well, designed well, and people are going to use it over and over again. And that’s just one segment, right? Then you’ve got to look at MTM, and then you’ve got to look at direct contracting and all these different things. And all the while, the market’s emerging and requirements are changing. And so you know, I think the first thing is just picking a specialty to start in. Where do you want to start that you think you’re going to generate enough interest and engagement from users and it’s going to fund your business so that you can grow and add new tooling to it? And so you know, I think that’s — the biggest barrier is just, you know, building a HIPPA-compliant, cloud-based platform that’s usable and applicable to a large group of pharmacies and pharmacists that find it useful. And then I think the next thing is really, you know, the marketing and adoption piece. And so how do you — again, this is not anything that I was taught in pharmacy school or residency — but how do you market a software product to a buyer who is really a health plan? Like enterprise sales is, again, not in our textbooks. So figuring out how to do that, what type of people you need on the team, what the strategy is, it’s incredibly complex. And sales cycles, again, thinking about healthcare, sales cycles are 18-24 months. That just means that’s how long it takes from the first conversation you have with a potential customer to actually closing a contract. You know, probably one of the worst industries to try to do that in. And a lot of people are doing it and figuring it out, and we are too. It just takes time.

Tim Ulbrich: It takes time. I want to think through this a little bit more from the user standpoint as well as from your standpoint from the business end. Obviously those are connected, but if we have somebody listening who’s at the frontlines in a community pharmacy and they’re hearing this and they’re like, “Yes. This is what I’ve been looking for, what I want to do,” how do they get this off the ground? I mean, are you working with the payer and then you reach out to the pharmacies that the payer is working with? Or can the pharmacy drive that up through you guys to then initiate the payer contracts? How would somebody listening, thinking about this, begin to put in place how they might operationalize it?

Samm Anderegg: This is awesome. I love talking about this stuff. I’m glad you’re asking these questions because there’s things that we’ve been asking ourselves for a really long time. And what I would say — and again, at this point in time, if we were to do this interview 12 months from now, the answer would probably be different.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Samm Anderegg: But at this point in time, we know that if we have a health plan that’s a partner, and they want to pay pharmacists for services, they just don’t know how to roll out that program, and sign up the pharmacies and make sure they’re credentialed and facilitate the payment. We know that we can walk into a health plan and provide a turnkey solution in the next 30 days. And we know that pharmacists will sign up for our platform and use our platform to get paid with that type of model because we’re doing it in the Midwest, we’re doing it across seven states, 300 pharmacies, 700 pharmacy users, one major health plan. And we’re eager to repeat that. We just need a pharmacy partner, someone at a payer that’s like, yeah, I like what these guys are doing and I believe in it. And on the other end, if you’re a pharmacist, right, you’re like, OK, I don’t know how I can help you with that if you don’t have a contact on the payer side. But on the pharmacy end, what we’re thinking is hey, if we build a tool that provides enough value like it creates more efficiency or it brings you new types of data, it helps you do things easier than other software that you’re using today or maybe you’re paying for software that does something that we can replace at no cost, right? We want to give you our tool for free. Like you can go to the website right now, sign up, we can get you basically turned in less than 24 hours. And you have access to the software. The main barrier right now is OK, now I’ve got to enter my patients in manually, hand type them in just as if you were starting with a brand new EHR. And we’re working to automate that to transfer your patients over automatically. But the key is if our tool is good enough, use it to be efficient, get data to show your value, and that makes the conversations a heck of a lot easier when you do approach your payer or whoever in your region, say, “Hey, you know, I’d really like to provide care for your members, your patients, and you’re going to get value when I do that. And let me show you why.” It helps you fuel your pitch to continue to grow your business. So that’s the second side of the coin.

Tim Ulbrich: So the website, just so you mentioned that, DocStation.co, DocStation.co if you want to go there and check it out, learn more. And I think just to build off of what you said, I mean, to me, the way we — as I hear and understand this, obviously you know much better than I do — but as we think about scaling this, it really needs uptake. I mean, it needs uptake from the payer side, it needs uptake from the pharmacy side. So part of my hope in sharing your story — not only sharing your entrepreneurial journey but also we know that we have a lot of listeners all across the country that might have some of these relationships or their pharmacies may be interested. And I’m hopeful we can see some momentum there. So you mentioned seven states, 300+ pharmacies. How many — you mentioned the payer — how many patients thus far have you served or you’re working with?

Samm Anderegg: So it’s roughly 32,000 patients.

Tim Ulbrich: OK, awesome. And then on the other side — I mentioned I wanted to talk about it from the pharmacist’s side — from the business side of it, as you’re willing to share, talk to use a little bit more about — obviously not specific numbers — but how you think about this from a, OK, at the end of the day, we’ve got to generate revenue. There’s a business model here. So what does that look like in terms of the payer relationships and how you build out a viable business model.

Samm Anderegg: Right. So when you’re in startup land, two ways to bring in money. And by bring in money, it means you’re on a fast track to grow your company, right? So you need to — really the biggest expense is hiring people. So hiring software engineers to build the product, expand the product, new features, maybe build it a little bit faster, but speed is usually not correlated with FTEs in that sense. And so you know, you could sell or you could fundraise. And I think what most people see on Twitter and in the news and on the show Silicon Valley is like you go out there and you raise multiple millions of dollars at these sky-high valuations that just seem fake. And that still goes on to a certain sense today, but it’s really hard for someone who’s coming out of healthcare with no previous experience starting a traditional technology company to say, “I’m a subject matter expert and I’ve got this really great idea that is really complicated to explain, but you should write us a check for $2 million.” That’s tough. It was really tough, and I wasn’t able to do it to get started. And so you know, you start looking at on the customer side and you look at health plans. And so what we’ve done is at first, it was bootstrapping. I drained down my savings account to basically $0, my cofounder did the same. I was able to convince my cofounder to take that risk as well. That was the first step. And then when you close your first customer, you’re saying, “OK. We’re bringing in x amount of money. How many people can we afford to hire?” And it’s really about understanding what — and these are different financial terms from the everyday life or everyday business — it’s about your runway and your burn rate. How much are you spending? How quick? And when are you going to die? And how do you make sure that you’ve got enough cash on hand to continue to extend that timeline? And you’re up — all the while, you’re weighing a lot of different factors. OK, if I fundraise from this group, do I trust them? Do I want to work with them for the next 10 years? Because you’re basically getting married to them. And they’re going to take a significant portion of equity in your company, and they’re going to have a board seat. And so there’s lots of things to calculate and understand and weigh. But you’re doing this pretty much daily, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Samm Anderegg: And so yeah, you know, we’re going hard on the sales and the customer thing. We believe that our product’s at a place right now where it’s going to generate immediate value for a health plan. And we’re working on that on the pharmacy side too. I believe the tool is really great. We need pharmacists to tell us, hey, this is what’s missing. I would use this if. And all the while, you’re looking at that bank account every day and you’re saying, OK, how much time have we got? How much time we got? How much time we got? Until you’re ready to pull the trigger and find an alternative source of funding. So that’s the current situation, man.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think just hearing you talk, you know, kind of bringing this full circle, it goes back to you better be doing something that you love here and you’re passionate about, you believe in, because when you’re talking about things like drain your bank account, going into partnerships, cofounders, challenges that come — I mean, don’t get me wrong, I wouldn’t change any of it for the world and if you have that itch and desire and passion about something, you just can’t ignore it. You know as well as I do, you’re going down this path regardless. You can’t stop it. But it better be down something you love because it’s going to have a lot of implications. And I even think on the money side, I’ve been listening to a lot of The Pitch podcast on Gimlet Media, and great stuff. But you know, kind of that fundraising side, and I think often we think of this glorious side of raising money, but there’s also this other side of you have lots of opinions now, you’ve got baggage that comes with that, you’re obviously giving up equity, so you know, there’s pros and cons to that. And obviously you guys decided to try to cash flow as much as you can up front and obviously there’s challenges with that as well. Talk to me for a moment about a cofounder as well as the first hires. I think that’s a lot we don’t hear about in the business trajectory and growth. We hear a lot of the glorious parts of you start something, you got a cool idea, you’re doing your own business, and that’s like cool. What we don’t talk about is some of that next phase challenges I would say like bringing on partners or even hiring your first employee at the expense of paying yourself because you really feel like that’s what you need. So what was that decision like? You know, was it a cofounder from the beginning? Was it somebody you brought on later? And how did you make that decision of what would be additional benefit obviously that they would bring perhaps and a different expertise?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, I think my administrative training in management, you did some hiring with that. You know, in my first job, I hired quite a few people. But when it comes to starting something from the ground up and your cofounder is really like a first hire but so much more than that, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Samm Anderegg: There’s so much more risk in choosing the wrong person, especially with that cofounder situation. So you know, when you’re looking at startups and the most successful ones and how they got started, it’s like, you know, these people have been friends since childhood and one ran off to be a software engineer and the other got her MBA and they circled back and found this great idea and they built a $1 billion company. I didn’t have any of those types of friends. And you know, you just — what I’ve learned is you just talk about to everyone that you know. And you know, I had some friends in pharmacy that were interested and ultimately, I needed the skillset that I needed to complement my own was on the software engineering side. Right? You need someone to actually build the product. And so what I did is I knew that this is a person that I wanted to — really, I needed a friend, a friend that seemed like a childhood friend that I knew that was willing to — we could go through tough times together and come out on top and someone that was really empathetic and caring and like understood, you know, the risk and really be in it together. So what you have to do is when you’re meeting somebody blind, which I did — I met like four or five different people that I did some projects with, right? You start with a project, see how that project goes, how you really work together, and then spend time with them personally too to talk through things to see if you’re a match. And so yeah, I found Josh in Austin. I looked everywhere. But met him, met his wife Rachel and you know, I feel like I’m a member of their family now and vice versa. And so you’ve just got to be careful and do as much testing as you can. And I think the people that I met before Josh, it didn’t feel right, but I kind of wanted to continue to try to make it work. But you know, when we did meet up and start working together, you could feel it, you know? It felt right. It felt like it fit.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think you often hear about the negative side of partnerships. I know I did. I grew up in a small business family where a partnership went bad, you know, in a family business, so I felt like I heard very much of that side. But I think you don’t hear as much of the positives that can come — and I know speaking from personal experience, sounds like for you as well, I could not imagine going at it alone. And I think if you find that right relationship or fit, what you can get in terms of not only different expertise, perspective, but I think it’s a classic example of two are better than one alone. And I think you get a duplicate effect when you have really the right fit and the different expertise that two people can bring. When I think about a CEO role, I think about things like obviously strategic direction of the business, you’re thinking about the leading the team, and I know you’ve got a team that works with you and that presents its own set of opportunities and challenges. You think about business development, strategic relationships, really being the face of the company, which one, is very different than anything we’ve ever trained for in school or even in the residency you went through but also is very different than likely the role you started out with in the company where you’re really in the weeds on the product side. So talk to me about that transition to that role, maybe struggles you’ve had or how you’ve effectively made that transition where you can kind of take more of that global perspective and when you have other people on board, really serving in that CEO role of driving the strategic direction of the company, allowing the other people to be in the weeds on the other parts.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah. It’s — you learn as you go is the big thing. I know that’s general, it’s not really great advice by any means. But you do. And I think intuitively, you know it’s all about focus. What is the most important thing that you need to do? What is the biggest thing that’s blocking you from taking the next step? That’s what it is at the very early stage. And so the first one was OK, finding a cofounder because I knew I couldn’t fundraise and I knew it would take too long to code. So once I found Josh, it was like OK, what’s the next thing? Well, we need to build something that people will buy. And so you know, we built a prototype and helped work on that. And at the very beginning stage, I was like helping out with the back end architecture and used my whatever I borrowed from Microsoft Access skills that I learned in residency. Like you know, trying to build the database. It didn’t go well. I’m not in that position anymore. I’m not — but you know, you just, priorities change and new things come up and they shift. And at the early stage, it’s really on a monthly basis, maybe. But as your business grows and you bring on new people and you start delegating some responsibilities, things get more complex. I hate to say it. They get more complex, and you’re trying to figure out where can I make the most impact this week?

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Samm Anderegg: Or this quarter. And a lot of it — and every company is a little bit different, depending on who you have on the team, what your roles are and what your biggest, what you’re trying to accomplish. But where I fit in now is really sales and leadership and building a team. We went through this accelerator program called TechStars. It’s like a three-month residency program, if you want to put it in pharmacy terms, for young startup companies to try to give you the skills on the tech side. Yeah, it was exactly what we needed at that point in time. But the biggest lesson I took away about the CEO role is when things get so complex and hazy, it’s like you have three responsibilities: vision, people, and funding.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh, so good. Yep.

Samm Anderegg: So that, you know, I can sigh and relax a little bit when I remind myself that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep. I love that. And that’s a good reminder, reminder for me. It’s just such a shift from the roles that we’re used to, either in our day job or the way we’ve been trained. And I’ve been following along your newsletter. And I think I can see that you’re doing an awesome job of that with your team and really focusing on the team aspect of it. So one question I have for you is about the future — kind of combines the future of the business and the future of the profession. You know, as I understand your product is really focusing on leveraging the community pharmacist to be able to interact with patients and provide the service that they’re trained to do and connecting the payers to pharmacies to do this. Two ways of looking at this: One is that this is an area that’s being disrupted. Will community pharmacy — obviously I’m being dramatic here — will community pharmacy exist in terms of the brick-and-mortar? There’s disruptors like Amazon, PillPack, others that are gaining in the space. Margins are being cut, we’ve got PBM issues, DIR fees, all these things. Will that model exist? And therefore, what’s the threat potentially depending on that model? The other way of looking at that is that you’ve got in this brick-and-mortar pharmacy world, we’re the most successful healthcare professional in the country. So we are theoretically placed and ready to be in the prime position to do exactly what you’re trying to do and grow. So I’m guessing this dichotomy is something you think about often in terms of the disruptions happening in the industry but also simultaneously the opportunity that exists with your business model. So talk us through how you envision that and how you think through that.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, man, I think you hit the nail on the head. And you’re not being dramatic at all. You know, I’ve been talking about this for years and more critically in the past couple years. We’ve got a lot of industry pressure going on, specifically in the community pharmacy setting. And so you know, we’ve got this coronavirus thing happening right now, and it’s like, man, you know, we could have got out ahead of this, in front of this, and people were downplaying it. I think we’re in the same situation in pharmacy. Right? Like if you realize that there are pressures, if you don’t feel them, if you’re not a business owner or community pharmacy owner and you’re not writing the tens of thousands of dollars in checks back to the PBM for these DIR fees, and you see your volume decreasing as people are shifting to mail-order or PBMs are requiring mail-order, man, it’s rough out there. And it’s going to happen quick. But you know, what I — going back to your second point is it is an opportunity. But we have to be ready, right? And the biggest missing piece that I saw and really, another huge reason to start the company, is that let’s say this happened in a more positive light. Let’s say either federal government gave us provider status tomorrow. And all of a sudden, pharmacists could be reimbursed in the same rate as physicians for the services that were within their scope of practice determined by their state. OK, what next? Right? And I don’t think most people who are advocating for this have a good answer for that.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s exactly right. Yep.

Samm Anderegg: And so you know, we — these negative pressures are — they’re being applied. It’s a little bit longer term, just not kind of an instantaneous need. But we still have that gap, and so that’s what we’re trying to build in this tool. And DocStation is we want to be able to hand this piece of software over to a pharmacist and say, “Alright, provider status gets passed tomorrow or your business starts taking a hit and you need a new clinical revenue stream, here you go. Sign up, start providing care, and money will get deposited in your bank account.” So you know, it’s inevitable. Like our profession is going to change.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Samm Anderegg: And we need to do everything that we can to start preparing for that. I think a lot of entities are, they’re preaching that word, but we’ve got to be in this together you guys.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree, and I think your point is so spot-on that we’ve been spending so much time talking about things like the acquisition of provider status. And we talk a lot here in Ohio and I think nationwide as well that without payment, without contracts, that’s really a symbolic move. And I think the question is how do you operationalize it and not only how do you operationalize it, but are we ready and are we willing and wanting to operationalize it as a profession? And I think the research, a lot of the research and work that hasn’t been done is I know living in the academic circles, living in the association circles, it’s all talked about in a positive tone. But I don’t think that’s representative of how everyone feels about it for good reasons of the challenges they’re facing on the frontlines. And I really want to give a shoutout here, I think some of the work that we’re doing in Ohio, the Ohio Pharmacists Association, my colleagues at Ohio State, Jen Rhodes, Stu Badey, Michael Murphy, Christine Mason, they are asking these questions and really having some of this conversation and doing the work talking about how do we actually operationalize provider status, Bridget Groves at OPA, and really get past just that symbolic passing of the legislation. And I think the work that you’re doing at DocStation so nicely aligns with that as well. Last question I have for you, kind of a fun, light-hearted one, you know, here you are, obviously in this CEO role of DocStation, thinking about the future of the profession, the vision. What are you drawing from? What are you reading, what are you listening to where you draw some of your inspiration and get some of the knowledge that inspires the work that you do?

Samm Anderegg: That’s a great question. Depends on the time and what current issue or stage or what’s most important when I try to find a book that is loosely related to that. And even if I pick up a random book, a lot of times, the timing is right. But you know, at the beginning, there’s a couple books that I took from, Y Combinator Startup School has founders come in and lecture, like successful ones and they mention they’re reading this. And so “Crossing the Chasm” was probably one of the most influential books that I read. It’s about marketing, it’s about introducing a new product to a market and who you need to target. That was huge. Another one, I thought I knew tech, but I didn’t understand what tech really was on a large scale, on a global scale. And so “Behind the Cloud,” which was written by the founder of SalesForce in San Francisco. That was a really influential book. And recently, you know, now that we’ve progressed a little bit as a company and we’re trying to build a sustainable business that is durable for years, I went back to the basics and picked up Jim Collin’s “Good to Great,” and man, what a great read that is about research-based and gives you the right tools and things to focus on and helps you simplify it. That has been the most impactful one lately. And I’ll throw in one more if that’s OK.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure. Absolutely.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah. If you’re starting a business, “The Hard Thing About Hard Things” by Ben Horowitz of Andresen-Horowitz is like my pacifier. Like if something’s going wrong, or it’s just a slog, you’re in that rut, which you do, you go in ruts and then you have peaks. But man, that is — he just does a great job of not telling you here’s 10 steps to building a successful company but here’s what it’s really like and here’s how messy it is and here’s what happened to us, here’s what we did in those scenarios. So you know, when you think times are tough, you know you’re not alone reading that book. So yeah, I highly recommend that.

Tim Ulbrich: We’ll link to all three of those in the show notes. I’ve got two new ones to add to my reading list, “Crossing the Chasm” and “The Hard Things about Hard Things” and then rereading “Good to Great.” So good reminder on those. Two part question to wrap up here, Samm. Where can our listeners go to learn more about DocStation, the work that you’re doing? And then how can they get involved as well if they’ve heard something today and they say, I want to be a part of this.

Samm Anderegg: Yep. Easiest way to get in touch is go to the website, DocStation.co. There’s a “Get Started” button in the top right. Click that, fill out the form. And I know that seems like rudimentary or like not very personal, but it notifies us directly and notifies me directly. And so we’ve got a great couple people that watch that, monitor that 24/7. Response rate is in like three minutes. And so we’ll reach out to you directly. And then we’ll become personal, I promise you. That’s the easiest way to do it.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Samm, thank you so much for taking the time, for sharing your journey. I know you’ve inspired me and I have a feeling will do the same for many of our listeners. So thank you very much.
Samm Anderegg: Thanks, Tim. It was a pleasure.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 144: How Two Pharmacists Paid Off $214k of Student Loans in 17 Months


How Two Pharmacists Paid Off $214k of Student Loans in 17 Months

Levi Ellison, PharmD, shares how he and his wife paid off $214,594.55 of student loans over 17 months. Levi talks about the motivations behind such an aggressive repayment strategy, how they were able to do it and what they hope to accomplish now that they are debt free.

About Today’s Guest

Levi Ellison has been married to his loving wife, Jessica Ellison, since the summer of 2018 following their May graduation from the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences College of Pharmacy in Little Rock. While in pharmacy school Levi was a winning team member of the 2017 Good Neighbor Pharmacy National Community Pharmacy Association Pruitt-Schutte Student Business Plan. Immediately following graduation he received a $20,000 sign on bonus for a 2-year commitment to work in his hometown of Mena, Arkansas as a staff pharmacist at Walgreens. He serves as a Sunday school teacher for young adults at Salem Baptist Church, Treasurer of the Polk County Republican Committee, and served as a Financial Peace University Coordinator. He enjoys running, traveling with his wife, spending time with his family, and being debt free!

Summary

Levi Ellison shares his remarkable story of how he and Jessica, his wife who is also a pharmacist, paid off $214,594.55 of student loan debt over 17 months. While in school, Levi and Jessica were pretty aware of how much money they were taking out and knew that they didn’t feel good about taking out more than they needed. That mentally paired with some scholarships allowed them to both graduate under the average debt load that most pharmacists carry.

They were motivated by Joe Baker’s personal finance class in pharmacy school and by Dave Ramsey’s book Total Money Makeover. Following the Dave Ramsey approach, they knew that they wanted to attack their debt in a gazelle-like fashion so that they could move on to other financial goals that are important to them. By following a strict budget and using a budgeting app called EveryDollar along with a homemade allocated spending budget, they were able to pay off $214,594.55 in 17 months while tithing 10% of their gross income to their church. This payoff breaks down to:

$151,478.51/year

$12,623.21/month

$2,899.93/week

$414.28/day

Levi discusses how they worked together as a team to accomplish this goal and what their plans are now that they aren’t spending over $12,000 a month on student loans.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist. Excited to welcome Levi Ellison onto the show to share his debt-free story. Levi, welcome and thank you for taking the time.

Levi Ellison: Thank you, Tim. It’s great to be with you.

Tim Ulbrich: So grateful that you reached out to share your incredible story of paying off a lot of debt, a lot of debt, in a really, really short period of time. When I first heard about your story, you and your wife Jessica tackling over $214,000 of debt over 17 months, I thought to myself, wow, what an amazing accomplishment. And I can’t wait to hear exactly more of the details about how you accomplished this and why you were so aggressive in your repayment. And I’m excited to share this with the YFP community as well. So let’s start. Can you share a little bit of background about you and your wife Jessica, where you went to school and then ultimately the work that you’re doing now?

Levi Ellison: Yes. So my wife and I, Jessica, we went to the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences. And that’s in Little Rock, Arkansas. We met in school there, pretty much simultaneously there and our church and in Sunday school. So we were in the same classes, we were in the same church, so we’re doing everything together and ended up getting married the summer following pharmacy school. And on our honeymoon, we got a — I received a sign-on bonus from Walgreens and that was a substantial figure and if you don’t mind me sharing, I’ll just tell the YFP community, it was $20,000. And that sounds awesome and it sounds great. It’s like, wow, you could put $20,000 straight towards loans. But once it hits your bank account, it suspiciously looked like $13,000.

Tim Ulbrich: The tax.

Levi Ellison: Yeah, yeah. It was terrible. But that day it hit our account on our honeymoon. As soon as we got home, we put that all towards loans. And that really got the ball rolling. And we were, you know, obviously very intense with the way we paid off loans just from the get-go and never looking back I think really set up a strong foundation for us.

Tim Ulbrich: So and I want to make sure our audience understands, so two pharmacists, obviously.

Levi Ellison: Yes. Right.

Tim Ulbrich: But nonetheless, as people start to translate this to their personal situation, something I mentioned to you before the show, is I did that for me, two pharmacists’ income, there’s only so much take-home pay. So when we talk about, you know, figures like $12,600 roughly per month over that 17-month period on average, that means there was a lot of sacrifice, a lot of cutting of expenses and obviously now you’re on the back end of that, and we’ll talk about the journey between, but nonetheless, two pharmacists’ income does not necessarily just mean that this was an easy path. And so I want to re-emphasize that. Now, one of the things, Levi, I often wonder is we don’t talk much about the accrual phase of the debt. You know, we talk about the debt paydown part of it, but for someone who clearly had very strong motivations right after school to get this paid off, I’m wondering, I’m guessing many of our listeners are wondering, well, what did you think about this while you were in school? Did it really dawn on you? Did it bother you? And as you look back, what strategies did you take or could you have taken to mitigate some of that damage rather than obviously what we’re going to talk a lot about as the payoff part?

Levi Ellison: Tim, that’s a fantastic question, no kidding. I love to answer that. So for me, during school, you know, the first time I signed up for a student loan was my first year of pharmacy school. I took out $20,000. And I thought, phew, this hurts, as I’m sure most of us experienced. I don’t think I like this. And I didn’t. And it started to wear on me. You know, your first year, you’re thinking, I’m just excited to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: But as you — if you log in maybe once every couple years during pharmacy school and you look, you’re kind of shocked. And I was. And so they did a few small scholarships while I was in school, and I applied for those. Got $1,000 here, $1,000 there. But when you’re talking about the kind of numbers that pharmacy school costs, that’s just not a huge percentage. Every bit helps, but my fourth year of school, they have like a — I don’t know what you would call it — but an ultimate scholarship. It was $15,000 from UAMS that they give away to one student. And I applied for that, had to write an essay, and I got it. And that was really helpful, you know? I could have been more in debt than I was. And so I got that, and then I also applied for a rural scholarship where our Arkansas State Board of Pharmacy, if you’ll go and work in an area of I think it’s 15,000 or less people — I forget all the details. But I know my hometown qualified, and so I was like, I’m going to go back home anyway if they’re going to pay me to do it. I’ll take $15,000 for that and go. And so — it was $15,000 for the scholarship. I got $7,500 from the state board. And so that was over the course of a couple years of pharmacy school, so that helped mitigate some of my own student loans.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: And then my wife, I think she was fiscally conservative too. And I know she’s going to be listening to this. But I was able to get some of those things, and so that helped on my side. So it wasn’t like I just came out of school and suddenly noticed that I had debt. I mean, I was realizing this and had I known it while I was in undergrad — because we both came out of undergrad debt-free completely. And so that was helpful. But if I’d have really thought this through, I would have started earlier.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: So if there’s aspiring pharmacists out there that are listening to this show and wonder how they can get through school debt-free, be smart is going to be some of the things I’m sure we’re going to talk about as far as budgeting and saving and I wish I’d have done more of that earlier.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and you and I both know from personal experience just how interest accrues on those loans, especially when you’re in graduate school, unsubsidized loans. And I think what you said is really profound — I felt the same way. You’re in school the first year, you’re excited about the opportunity, you’re not really thinking much about it or what this will be at the end. And what it sounds like, though, what I heard there, Levi, is that you guys really did some things in terms of scholarships and you mentioned the rural piece that allowed you to be in less debt than you could have been.

Levi Ellison: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: I mean, if we look at the averages now, graduates today roughly $170,000. So if we’re going to multiply that by two, obviously you guys worked with a lot of debt, but you were for two pharmacist graduates, you were below the average when you combine the two of those together. So but I think wisdom there, you know, students that are listening, you know, that’s what we kind of always preach is hey, anything that you can be doing to minimize the amount that’s borrowed, even if it seems insignificant, you know, if it’s $18,000 a semester instead of $20,000 a semester, that compounds because of interest and multiple semesters over time.

Levi Ellison: Right. Yeah, if I could add one other tidbit to that, Tim —

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: We both worked while we were in school. I think that’s important not only just financially but just learning. If you want to be a good pharmacist, I don’t think your first day behind the counter ought to be the day you get your license. And so that was helpful as well, clearly, for both of us.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. Yeah, and I think that’s another good reminder, even if that hourly wage doesn’t seem super significant in the scheme of things, it adds up. I want to talk for a moment about the education piece — and a shoutout here to Joe Baker, who we’ve had on the show, has been long in the financial education space at UAMS I think teaching that personal finance elective course since 1999 and has had what I interpret to be a very profound impact on many students coming out of that program and his teachings. And I sense the same here. So tell me a little bit about that class, the personal finance elective that he taught. And what were some of the big takeaways and ultimately what impact that had on your own personal journey?

Levi Ellison: Yeah, so Joe Baker is a tremendous teacher. He gets in there and really makes the class engage. And that was a big reason I guess why I learned so much in there. And I do owe a lot of influence and credit to him for our story. That’s where we picked up the book “The Total Money Makeover” by Dave Ramsey and I’m sure we’ll get into kind of the steps of how we got out of debt, and that was very influential and we followed that to a T. But Joe, he — I tell you what, Tim, I mean, he cares about students and he cared about me and he still checks in with me from time to time. You know how you can sort emails on your phone or on your computer?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Levi Ellison: And I’ve got a separate little inbox for him and so I can read through all his financial stuff that he sends out, updates and things to do and not to do and just staying engaged with money. And it’s not like something that you read 24/7, but as long as you’re staying up-to-date on stuff, you can really make big differences. And we did, anyway. Yeah, love Joe.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. I sense he’s a great teacher and he’s actually working on a book right now and as I’m reading through it, I feel like it’s just spewing with wisdom of multiple years of experience and his teachings to many students along the way. One of the things you said in the email that you and I had connected prior to the interview was the impact of learning things like Time Value of Money and other things. And so I think this is again just a great reminder for students listening, if you have that opportunity like an elective if you’re in college, taking advantage of that. I think it just brings the topic front and center and develops that passion hopefully towards learning. But if not, going out there and finding it. You know, podcasts, blogs, sites that are out there, courses that are out there that can help you learn more about this. So let’s get into the x’s and the o’s. So I’m going to break down the numbers again of what you guys were working with. Total debt load — or excuse me — a total payoff of $214,594.55, but who’s counting, right, with the $.55?

Levi Ellison: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: And if we average that out a little bit more about $151,000 per year, a little over $12,600 per month, $2,900 per week, over $400 per day. That per day is the one that my gosh, when you see that number, you’re like, holy cow.

Levi Ellison: Yeah, that floored both of us because we didn’t realize because you don’t write that check every day.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Levi Ellison: We wrote it every two weeks when we got paid.

Tim Ulbrich: So as I alluded to already, I see that number, $12,600 per month. Even on two pharmacists’ salary, that is incredible. There is only so much take-home pay to work with. So talk us through how you did it. It sounds like the baby steps were a big part of this. But even more details about the budget and kind of how you and Jessica worked together, really each and every month, and I’m sure it was even more often than that.

Levi Ellison: Sure. So I think budget is the key as far as how we were able to do it. More importantly when you get into kind of the nitty-gritty of how we budgeted, is we learned something called an allocated spending plan. And so every two weeks, I have a little Excel chart. I’m a big nerd, so I love looking at this thing. We, you know, just put the money in our checking account in the top line and then we subtracted everything else that was essential, you know, from electric bill, water bill, all your normal stuff, wherever your money’s going to go for the next two weeks. And then whatever money was left over, we immediately, as soon as that hit our checking account, we would put it towards the loan because we knew every day that was passing was about $30 in interest being added. And so if you do it one day sooner, you save $30. I mean, it’s not a full $30 because you’re not getting it all, but that mindset. And so that was how we did it is we just, we said these things are what we have to have. And I can tell you, Tim, over the course of those 17 months, we can count on one hand how many times we ate out on our dime. Our parents took us from time to time, her family would take us, mine would, you know, that sort of thing. But as far as just going even fast food, no. We planned very carefully. I can remember — and we bought a few things that we had to have or at least we thought we did like Jessica’s phone broke, so we went to the AT&T store and I can remember it’s about an 80-mile drive from where we are out in rural Arkansas. And we get there to the AT&T store and we’re like, should we eat lunch before we go in or after? We’re like, well, the food will probably get hot because it’s in the car in our lunch boxes. And so we’re sitting there, eating a sandwich in the AT&T store. We’re like, this is going to be worth it.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Levi Ellison: And I can tell you, it is so worth it now. We look back on that, we laugh, like that was so funny. And now when we go there for traveling, we can go out to eat and have all the chips and salsa we want, you know.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right.

Levi Ellison: It’s fun.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think there’s something fun about the journey, right? I’m sure for you and Jessica, that brought you guys together in a different way and obviously I can tell just as I hear you talking, you’re reflecting on that together. It was something you accomplished together, and I think that’s a piece we don’t talk enough about is you know, from a marriage standpoint, two people working on something like that and making some sacrifices and working together, that has long, long-term effects, you know, obviously for the good. So I think that’s worth noting as well. Talk to me more about the budget. I’m guessing — I’m wondering, I’m guessing our listeners are wondering as well, it sounds like more of a zero-based budget kind of model.

Levi Ellison: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: Accounting for every single dollar that you’re earning each and every month. You talked about an Excel spreadsheet.

Levi Ellison: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So was this something that you were leading the charge on? You guys were working together? Was it just staying in Excel? Were you utilizing any apps or tools to help you along that process?

Levi Ellison: Oh, those are all good questions. So we used EveryDollar, Dave Ramsey’s budgeting app. And we had the Premium version, and so it would sync with our phones as far as our — of course, we don’t have any credit cards. But it syncs with our debit cards and we could keep track of every single dollar that came out and came in. And that was kind of the goal for the month. And it gets a little confusing. Anybody that’s ever done a budget, you’re like, well, I still have money left over at the end of the month and I haven’t gotten paid yet for the next month. And so like if you’re sitting here, we’re recording this in March and I’m not going to get paid until April such-and-such date or whatever, you’re like, well, how do I budget for that? Because I’ve already got the money in my account, and so that’s where the allocated spending plan really came into play. And so we were on a two-week budget, even if we have goals for the monthly budget and we can throw that into that allocated spending plan, we can just say, OK, let’s spend a couple hundred dollars on clothes this month because we can now or whatever it is. And you take that and say, we’re going to spend it on this check here or you can do it over the course of a couple ones. And so that’s how we managed to keep track of everything. And as far as us doing it together, it was me doing the math and doing all the charts and stuff for the most part. But what I never did was make that finalized. We would come in together for sure every two weeks, and she would look at it and say, OK, I like this, don’t like this, and she would change a few things. But I’d have it ready for her to look at — at least I would try to. It doesn’t always work out perfectly.

Tim Ulbrich: So to that point, I mean, obviously to be able to pay off more than $200,000 in a very short period of time, two people have to be on the same page.

Levi Ellison: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: But you know, I’m guessing that that doesn’t necessarily mean it was always perfect. Maybe it was.

Levi Ellison: No.

Tim Ulbrich: What was — yeah, what were some of those challenges? And for those that are listening that, you know, may be of a more extreme situation where instead of just a challenge here or there, it’s two people that philosophically — you know, maybe they don’t agree on the goals or the intensity of it. Any words of wisdom there you can share about either challenges you all had or words of advice for others?

Levi Ellison: I don’t think you could have asked a better question. So for two people to be married, you have to be on the same page about money. I don’t know how you couldn’t be. And so this is not something that I just sprung on our honeymoon. We had talked about this beforehand as part of our premarital counseling. And so we were on the same page. And so one thing about us as far as motivation and why would you be so intense about this is we want to be good stewards of what we’ve been given. And so to understand our worldview or our framework that we work in, we’re Christians, and so we’re very involved in our local church. And so along the way, I think this is important for your listeners — we weren’t misers, we gave 10% of our gross income. And so if you factor that in to —

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Levi Ellison: — how much money we paid back on loans, we could have been out of debt a lot sooner. But we also lived a lot cheaper than some of your listeners are probably thinking, now realizing that we factor in that we make average pharmacist salaries, $120,000-130,000 a year and there’s two of us. And we tithe 10% of that. We gave a lot of money to the church, and that’s not a bragging issue, but it’s something we believed in. And so that’s one of the reasons why we did this so quickly and aggressively and we were on the same page is because we both had the same faith and we both are on the same page about money, and we knew that we wanted to do this. And you’re right about strengthening marriage to go back to the previous question is it surely did. When we look at stuff now, we say, “Yeah, we could do that. That won’t be a problem.” Like we know we can. We’ve done a lot harder stuff together.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it goes back to you guys had that common thread, you had that common viewpoint, which even if there were moments of maybe month-to-month, you didn’t see eye-to-eye on everything, obviously in a short period of time, you did see eye-to-eye on a lot. But nonetheless, you still had that common lens in which you’re working from. And we always talk about I think the importance of starting with the goal, starting with the why, and then getting into the nitty gritty of the budget because if you can agree on the philosophy, if you can agree on the direction, it’s much easier to agree on OK, in light of the philosophy, let’s talk about this one expense or this one issue.

Levi Ellison: If there’s no why, you’re never going to get to the what of driving a beater.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Levi Ellison: And I don’t really consider our cars beaters, but they’re probably worth about $3,000 apiece. And they run just fine. They don’t break down. They’re just little cars, and they do great.

Tim Ulbrich: So speaking of cars, a famous Joe Baker quote, there is not a parade watching you on the way to work.

Levi Ellison: Yes, I love that.

Tim Ulbrich: Which takes me to, you know, this concept of what decisions you guys made in terms of things to forego as you’re talking about making massive student loan payments or $12,600 a month, you’re talking about tithing, giving 10% of gross income throughout this, obviously you had to give up on some things, car being one I’m assuming. But home, other things, talk us through what were the areas that you decided not to spend money on that, you know, might have been difficult as you think about some of the challenges with kind of the peer comparison and keeping up with the Joneses.

Levi Ellison: Yeah. So I guess you could say we gave up on the car, you’re right about that. I’d love to be driving a brand new GMC Sierra. I would love it. But I’m not, and that’s OK. We’re going to pay cash for something like that one day or a slightly used one. And that’s fine because Joe Baker is 100% right. If you can get in the mindset of there’s not a parade watching you go to work, it doesn’t matter. And it’s kind of funny, people notice. One of my coworkers, one of the techs, her daughter asked her, said, “Why is Levi still driving that?” And she was sharing that with me, and it just made me laugh. Like they don’t get it. But you can share with them, say, “There’s a whole goal behind this. We want to be debt-free.” So that was one of the things that we gave up was car. As far as our housing situation, we haven’t bought a home yet. We’re renting, but we’re in a very good, quiet neighborhood. I love running, and so the streets are great for that, very little traffic. So I don’t really feel like we gave up much there. We’re living in a lot better place than the apartments that we both lived in Little Rock over the course of pharmacy school. You know, we have a backyard, a place for our dog, stuff like that. So we gave up a little. We don’t have a tremendous mountain view, we’re kind of in the mountains over here in Western Arkansas, and we look forward to that very soon. That’s one of the things that we’re saving for now. But I don’t feel like we gave up just a whole lot. We just didn’t have extensive dates.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: I was talking to my wife and said, “Do you want to share anything about that from your perspective on the show tomorrow morning?” And she said, “Well, we didn’t spend any money on dates.” I said, “That’s not true. I went to Redbox multiple times. I remember that $1.75.”

Tim Ulbrich: I was going to say, it started as a dollar, now it’s $1.75, right? So yeah. But there’s creativity there, right? I mean, again, those are moments that are created together. And I think I want to reiterate some of what you said. I mean, you know, used cars, renting, I think those are probably — if I had to pick two areas, no judgement here, but two areas that I would say often get in the way of being able to achieve other goals, here whether it is student loan repayment, but it could be any other goal, saving for retirement, saving for kids’ college, being able to give whatever, I would say it’s often the home and the car. And I think it’s shifting perspective that renting is not a bad thing. Renting is not evil, you know. You’re not necessarily just throwing money down the drain, and we talked about that on a previous episode with Nate Hedrick and really running the numbers objectively. And used cars, I mean, I think really changing your perspective on Point A to Point B, and one of the best things I heard on this was Ramit Sethi, who wrote a book, “I Will Teach You to Be Rich.” He talks about this concept of money dials. And identifying the things that mean most to you and align with your why and dialing those up. So let’s say for you and your wife Jessica, maybe it’s shared experiences together now that you guys have obviously a little bit more margin, spending money on that, not being afraid to spend money on that if that’s what means most to you. But if a car doesn’t mean a whole lot to you, then dial it down. Like you know what I mean? And find those things that really aren’t that important at the end of the day to you and really challenging yourself to think through those, each of those individually. So what do you say in response to, you know, some of the typical objections to the Dave Ramsey baby steps, right? So things like, you know, often only having $1,000 in emergency fund until you’re fully out of debt, and is that realistic, is that prudent. is that wise, you know, not to have a full 3-6 months? Or not establishing credit or building credit? Delaying retirement savings, perhaps? So what do you say? And I know your journey’s a little bit different because it was a shorter time period of 17 months, and I think where some of those challenges come in, especially on delayed retirement and emergency savings, is when you’re stretching it out say 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 15 years. But talk to us through how you all reconciled that that was the method, the steps, the path that was best for you and your plan.

Levi Ellison: I would say first off, if you’re going to follow the Dave Ramsey plan, you can’t be Dave-ish. You have to either do it or don’t. And so we decided we were going to do it, and we were going to be gazelle-intense, as he likes to say. We’re running away on the plain from the cheetah, and we’re going to make it. And so we did. And as far as like the emergency fund, that’s a temporary emergency fund of $1,000. We now have 6 months of expenses and with a very real coronavirus running around right now, that makes us feel better. I mean, it truly does. And so to have to owe no debt to anybody and to be as prepared as you can be for a crisis like this or a pandemic to not want to be fear-mongering, but we feel good about that piece of our plan. And pausing retirement for 17 months, I mean, the stock market just lost the biggest loss in 30 years. I guess I think we’re OK for now. You know, it’s not like we’re not going to buy a house. It’s not like we’re not going to ever fully fund our emergency fund, those types of things. It’s quick. I mean, if you’re going to do it, you need to do it. And so for us, we knew each other well enough, we were in the same study group, we were very good friends before we got married or even started dating. And so I knew her, she knew me, we both knew if we said we were going to do something, we were going to do it. And so we just had that resolve. That’s kind of the way it went for us. But as far as like credit goes, we have a goal of having no credit. And that may sound crazy to a lot of people, but you actually don’t need it. I went down to my local bank, said, “Hey, is this going to be a problem if we have no credit?” And they said, “No.” And so it’s almost laughable how the way people think that you have to have a credit score. You don’t. I’ve rented plenty of cars without a credit card. I’ve done all the things that you need to do. I’ve booked a $12,000 cruise celebrating getting out of debt, and it got canceled because it was the Grand Princess that was quarantined off the coast of California.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh my gosh.

Levi Ellison: Right. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh my gosh.

Levi Ellison: So there’s that. And that’s not a laughing matter, it’s a very serious thing.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: They’re going to reimburse us. We’re still waiting to hear back from flights, and so one thing I would change about my financial plan is buying insurance on flights.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Levi Ellison: I’ve never done that before, but I will be in the future because you never know what’s happening.

Tim Ulbrich: Although what are the chances of something like COVID-19, right?

Levi Ellison: Right, right, yeah. That’s what I said.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. So one of the things too that I heard there and I think often doesn’t get talked about, whether it’s the Ramsey framework or something like the Compass Money Map framework or another framework, I think a framework is very helpful, especially when you have multiple competing priorities that you’re trying to work through, debt repayment, retirement savings, emergency funds, and you’re looking at a way for two people to get on the same page. I think sometimes it’s a little bit more difficult if it’s one person’s idea and I want this other person to implement it, but I think sometimes a framework is a nice third party that gives you both an idea of something you can work towards together and hopefully have those shared goals. Last question I have for you is here you are now on the backside of this, and I think we often don’t talk about life after paying off debt. And what was $12,600 a month going towards student loans is no longer is no longer going towards student loans.

Levi Ellison: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: So what is the game plan now? What are the goals? And how have you adjusted to loosen up some of those things like hey, it’s OK to go out to eat, you know, every once in awhile, and it’s OK to enjoy those things. So talk to us a little bit about life after having the debt paid off.

Levi Ellison: Right, so this is a whole goal, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Levi Ellison: You don’t want to live below the federal poverty limit for 17 months and continue that until I retire. It’s not — that wasn’t the plan, so it’s exciting to be here and to like the cruise thing, we were spending $12,000 a month on loans and repaying that. We can book a $12,000 cruise, and it was going to be a really nice one, 11 days.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, yep.

Levi Ellison: And those things will work out in the future, and so we plan to take some trips. We want to go to Washington, D.C., want to tour the Capitol, do all the things that we wanted to do while we were in debt. And things, as far as having a framework, you are nailing it there. It is so important to have a plan. And so what we decided to do was to come up with like an annual budget. I know that sounds a little crazy for a household, but we have a year’s worth of plans and just kind of rough estimates, this isn’t as intense as our allocated spending plan as far as I know where every single penny is going. But we have plans in place to get us both vehicles, to have a certain amount of money in place to put a down payment on a home if we don’t end up paying cash for a home, which we might do. It depends on some different circumstances here at home, but having that annual plan in place I think is really going to help us, it’s already informing our decisions as far as when we get this money back from the cruise, what are we going to do with that, are we just going to go blow it anyway because it’s like it’s already gone or are we going to put and speed up the plan as far as well, if we go ahead and do this, we can get me a truck before summer, we can get her an SUV or whatever we want to do, which is a much more fun conversation than, ‘OK, it’s Friday again. Man, was that only two weeks ago that we paid $6,000? OK, here we go again.’

Tim Ulbrich: Another Redbox.

Levi Ellison: Push submit. Yeah, again at Redbox this week, that sort of thing. So it’s exciting to be able to talk about what we’re going to do with it versus we know exactly what we’re going to do with it.

Tim Ulbrich: And you know what I love, Levi, I know my wife Jess and I felt this, I sense the same for you and also a Jess is that when you are so used to grinding it out, I mean, $12,600 a month, for a 17-month period, it’s hard to measure, but there is such a long-term benefit of that beyond the 17 months. You know, yes, you’re going to loosen up the reins, yes, that’s OK, you guys should do that, you should enjoy it. And there’s balance and all that. But you’ve shifted that perspective on what really is important and where happiness does and does not come from. And I think that has such a long-term benefit beyond that 17-month period of how you’re utilizing your money. And I love that for you guys, I know you guys are teaching some of this now with Financial Peace, obviously giving is still a priority and really giving back and sharing some of that as you are doing here on the podcast as well. So really excited to see where this goes for you all and the impact you’re able to have on others because of obviously the margin that you have now to work with and the ability to share that. So thank you for coming on the show, thank you for taking time to share your journey. Congratulations. It’s really, really an incredible journey. And excited that you were willing to come on and share it with our community.

Levi Ellison: You’re very welcome. I enjoyed it.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 143: How Using Your Creativity Can Spark a Six-Figure Business


How Using Your Creativity Can Spark a Six-Figure Business: Art by Stephanie Roberts

Stephanie Roberts, PharmD joins Tim Church to share how she went from full-time pharmacist to full-time mixed media artist after an Instagram influencer shared her pill petri art and made it go viral.

About Today’s Guest

Stephanie grew up in the hills of Eastern Kentucky, a small rural town named Prestonsburg with less than 5,000 people. From as early as she can remember, her go-to response to “What do you want to be when you grow up?” was to be an artist. Growing up as a straight A, high achieving student, there wasn’t a terrible amount of encouragement to follow your dreams if our dreams were outside the tidy box of medical field/law/etc. Stephanie learned to think like most adults surrounding her that being an artist wasn’t a “real job” or career and never thought much of it past elementary school. Art has never left her though and even as she studied and made her way through undergrad (Georgetown College) and then into pharmacy school (University of Appalachia), she was always making and painting as a creative outlet.

After graduation, Stephanie managed a couple different retail chains for a few years (PIC at CVS and Meijer), and finally landed an amazing opportunity as staff pharmacist at the University of Kentucky, opening a new retail location for them in their newest pavilion on the medical campus. At this point she had been out of school for 4 years, married with a one-year old and art was mostly a distant memory. A few years into her new position, she leaped at the opportunity when a 30 hour / 3 days a week (still considered “full-time” for benefits purposes) was offered to her, within the same pharmacy. The extra days off gave her more time with my children (up to 2 boys at this point!) and time to take up a small amount of creativity again.

The work was enough to take up every minute of her spare time but still, she was only dreaming of making art her full-time job. Until July 2019 when her resin coasters with medications suspended inside — what she has named “pill petri” — went viral. This whacky combo she created on a whim combining her love of epoxy resin and her career in medicine, became the tipping point that truly began a whole new life for her. The business was more than she could handle and she worked literally all day and night. Stephanie hired help, all either technicians or interns from her pharmacy, and together they fulfilled orders. She started an online shop that she would stock with hundreds of coasters just for it to sell out within 2 minutes with each release. After the most exhausting 2 months of her life working 2 full-time jobs, she finally took the leap and became a full-time artist still working 1 day each week in the same pharmacy. While the income from art has far surpassed her pharmacy salary, she continues to work to retain her pharmacy knowledge and stay fresh in the profession.

Summary

Stephanie Roberts joins Tim Church on this week’s podcast episode to talk about her amazing transition from full-time pharmacist to full-time artist. Stephanie always loved art growing up and kept creating during college as a hobby. After graduation Stephanie started working with CVS, became manager and then got her own store. After that, she worked at a Meijer in her town and then decided to work at a new pharmacy at University of Kentucky hospital which she absolutely loves.

Three years ago, Stephanie started taking interest in different artists she likes and felt inspired to create more, so she did. Working with epoxy resin was really popular and she was interested in it, so she dove in, researched different techniques and started to create art pieces. She posted pictures of the pieces she made on Instagram but never put a price on them and finally decided to one day. When she did, it sold within 10 minutes. At the end of 2018, she started to make pill petri dish coasters and sell them on Instagram. In July 2019, a very popular Instagram account (@things.i.bought.and.liked) shared the pill petri coasters Stephanie makes and it made her go viral and ultimately changed her life. She had hundreds of orders come in and she couldn’t take all of them. A month after, she spoke with her pharmacy manager about going down to one day a week so she could focus on her art business.

Now, Stepanie earns more money with her art business than she would with a full-time pharmacist salary. She makes different art pieces like wall panel geodes, ocean pieces, pill petri coasters and has a commission list several months out. Every Sunday at 9 pm she opens her shop. No matter how much she lists, Stephanie sells out in two minutes.

Stephanie has brought in help from people in her pharmacy circle to aid her in making the pill petri coasters, her most popular piece. She hopes to hire a full-time employee in the future and loves that she’s able to spend more time with her three children, have a flexible schedule and do something she truly loves.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Church: Stephanie, thanks so much for stopping by and being part of this side hustle edition.

Stephanie Roberts: I am super excited to be here. Thanks so much for having me.

Tim Church: Well, shoutout to my wife for kind of getting this episode started because she reached out to me probably about a month or so ago from the time of recording this and said, “Hey, do you know who this Stephanie person is? She’s got some really cool art, and she’s a pharmacist. And I actually have one of her pieces of artwork as my cell phone background. And I think you should reach out.”

Stephanie Roberts: That is crazy. It doesn’t surprise me, but you didn’t tell me that ahead of time because, I mean, I think most of my audience is women. And I have men messaging me saying, “My wife really wants your art. Can I get it for a surprise for her?” So I feel like it comes from the females. So that’s really funny you said that.

Tim Church: That’s so cool. Well, I can’t wait to dig into the art and all the things that you’re doing in addition to pharmacy. But I want to start out with a couple icebreakers because I think it would be fun. So Stephanie, you have to sing karaoke. What song are you picking?

Stephanie Roberts: Probably anything Reba McIntyre. I think you can hear the southern accent in there, but I love me some Reba.

Tim Church: OK. And what’s — any specific one?

Stephanie Roberts: Probably “Fancy.”

Tim Church: OK.

Stephanie Roberts: I don’t know if you even know Reba, but —

Tim Church: Oh, I know Reba.

Stephanie Roberts: Right. I mean, and I’m not a big country listener. But I mean, I’ve loved Reba from the time I was little. And I have the red hair and everything, so it works.

Tim Church: Now, I did pick up the southern accent a little bit. Where are you from?

Stephanie Roberts: Kentucky. From eastern Kentucky, from the mountains. And I’m central Kentucky now. But the accent is still with me.

Tim Church: Oh, cool. Alright, I’ve got one more for you. You have to delete all but three apps from your phone. Which ones are you keeping?

Stephanie Roberts: Well, I have to keep Instagram because that’s my bread and butter. Let’s see, what else do I really use? Don’t care much for Facebook, but I guess I do still use it. And then a photo editing, again, that’s a big — I have so many photo apps, I don’t know if I could choose one. But that’s big for me and the business.

Tim Church: Cool. Well I like that. And I knew Instagram was going to be one of them, but I was curious what the others are going to be. Maybe your email, right, so you can still communicate with people that want to order?

Stephanie Roberts: Oh, I don’t know. It’s good and bad. The email folders are full, the DMs are full on Instagram. I can’t say I’m doing great at the communication. But I’m grateful for it. But yeah, I’m not too great at it.

Tim Church: Well, I want to start out with you talking about your career path as a pharmacist because obviously this show is about side hustles and how you’ve been able to grow a business. But obviously, that was not where you started. You started out as a pharmacist. So I want to hear about that.

Stephanie Roberts: Oh, OK. Well, so not the most interesting career path, but I always knew I would be in retail pharmacy. So before I had even graduated pharmacy school, I had done an interview with CVS. And they hired me on the spot. And that just seemed like a great, you know, right-out-of-school job for me. I don’t think I had planned too much into where I wanted to be, which is great if you don’t have big expectations, then you won’t get let down. So I started with CVS and quickly became manager with CVS. I floated around and then I got my own store. And from there, that was still — it was a big commute for me. I was commuting about one and a half hours, so that was pretty exhausting when you drive an hour and a half and you have a 14-hour day and you drive an hour and a half back and then you do it again the next day. So another grocery store pharmacy that was in my actual town in Lexington, Kentucky, called me because they were looking for a manager that already had experience. And so I snapped up working at Myer because that was in town where I actually lived. And so I was with Myer for a period of time and then I had a customer that would come in all the time, and he was kind of a retired pharmacist. He had worked with Eli Lilly in Indianapolis, and he was getting his license in Kentucky. He didn’t really love it; he didn’t want to, but his wife was urging him to just so he could work part-time with the University of Kentucky. And that’s where his wife was a pharmacist too. Hey Jeff, if you’re listening. And he told me they were opening a new pharmacy. And I mean, he was just — he was so nice. I wasn’t even looking for another job, but he was like, “You really, really should look into it.” So I did, and I’ve been at UK ever since. It’s retail pharmacy, but it is completely different than what most people think of retail pharmacy. And it’s been awesome. I mean, I’ve said many times, if we ever moved out, I could never do old-school retail pharmacy ever again. It’s, you know, it sometimes can be the worst of the worst. But at UK, we do a lot for the employees and stuff but mostly with the inpatient, we have a program called Meds to Beds that delivers all the medications to the patients before they’re leaving, we service a lot of our transplant patients, we continue to do their medications through mail order, we have a specialty pharmacy. It’s just — and importantly, no drive through, which is a big win for retail pharmacy. But it’s so interesting. No day is ever the same as the last. It’s just — it’s really cool. It’s been eye-opening. I’ve learned a lot. I mean, I’ve learned about medications that are probably learned about in pharmacy school, I don’t even remember, but I’ve had to relearn them because they are fast movers whereas you wouldn’t have even seen them in your normal or average retail pharmacy. So that’s where I still am today one day a week. And I really love it there. I love the people and I love the way they run their pharmacy. And they give you plenty of help. We have so many pharmacists and so many technicians working together. And it’s so great to be able to bounce off any questions, bounce them off another pharmacist or anything when you’re just unsure of something where I wasn’t used to having that before. So yeah, that’s where I am today.

Tim Church: Wow. It sounds like you’re in a much better environment and that you really have a positive working atmosphere with your colleagues and just the things that you’re able to do. What are some of the other things that you like about it compared to other traditional pharmacy models?

Stephanie Roberts: Kind of like what I said about we’re not traditional in the way that we don’t have the drive-through. We don’t have a lot of people coming — not a lot coming outside into our pharmacy as in like outside of the hospital because we’re doing a lot of discharges, a lot of the prescriptions for the patients inside plus the employees and their families. So we really get to know our patients. We don’t see a lot of drug-seeking behavior, which I saw a lot in retail pharmacy. You know, that was kind of a fear, sometimes a safety concern when you’re working until 10 at night and, you know, other pharmacies have been robbed or things just look suspicious in the store. And I don’t really have that fear at UK, kind of in the heart of the hospital and if you wanted to take something from the pharmacy, you’re going to kind of have a long run to get out and pass security into a waiting car. You know what I mean? So it’s — I love that for even safety concerns. We’ve become a 24/7 pharmacy now. That just started about a year ago. So if you even have to work overnight, it’s a great place to be. So in those terms, everything’s interesting, everything’s different. Interesting also means you have new sets of problems and things when it comes to mail order and maybe people didn’t ask for their medications in time, so you’re calling a courier to drive it to them across the state because you don’t want any of your organ transplants to lose their well-earned organ. But it’s always interesting. I just can’t even compare it to any retail pharmacy I had experience with before. It’s pretty cool.

Tim Church: Yeah, I mean, it sounds like a great place to be if you’re a pharmacist. And like you said, it’s not only — it’s challenging, but it’s interesting. And you’ve got a great support team to help you along the way. So I think that’s really cool. Now, people listening may have just picked that up and said, “Stephanie, how are you only working one day a week?” And obviously some people choose to work part-time and they choose to work as-needed, but you know, you’re working one a day a week. And obviously as we were talking about before the podcast started that that’s not how it always was. So let’s jump into how Art by Stephanie got started because obviously that’s part of the story and how you’re working one day a week.

Stephanie Roberts: Right. And it seems kind of counterintuitive when I say I’ve got this wonderful job and now it’s, you know, down to one day a week by choice because I’ve decided to do something else. But I really loved it if I was going to do pharmacy full-time forever. And who knows? One day I might go back to full-time. But that’s where I would want to be. But the art kind of fell into my lap. So I’ve always loved art since I was a little girl, that was always my go-to when somebody asked me what I wanted to be, it was going to be an artist. But you know, as you grow up, not usually — people don’t usually encourage that as a career because let’s get real, there’s not a lot of artists we know that are doing it as a full-time career and paying all the bills. I’m not trying to say I’m special in any way, but you know, it’s not something parents usually encourage their kids to do. I have awesome parents, wonderful parents. So I’ve always done it as a hobby on the side, kind of always did it through undergraduate. As I became a pharmacist, it was something that was probably let go of for a few years. I got married, graduated from pharmacy school the next year, a few years later we had our first of three kids, and so you know, life was pretty busy. And probably about three years ago, I think through Instagram and YouTube and things like that, I started really taking interest in some artists that I love. I think Justin Gaffrey is one of my first artists I ever just like fell in love with his paintings. They’re really textured, and I’m just a texture lover. I love when paintings or art just like jump off the canvas. So I really loved Justin Gaffrey. A few others that I just watched and realized they were — they had a career. I mean, they were doing great. And a lot of their interest was through Instagram. And not that even in my head at that point was I saying, oh, I could become an artist one day. It’s just like I felt inspired to create. So I did. And I would share pictures. And still, I wasn’t trying to go after anything. I was just enjoying it and it was a great creative outlet. So I did that for a few years. It really started with paintings at first. And then I think epoxy resin kind of just like hit the art scene and everybody just started getting resin and I was really interested in that. So I started resin work and kind of 50-50 between painting and resin work. And one day, I just decided after a few years of this and just posting pictures, never trying to get sales, not pushing anything, I just wanted to create and share what I was doing, I decided to put a price in the text of the picture on Instagram, just wondering, you know, I feel awkward asking somebody how much something is. So maybe other people feel awkward too. You know? You’re afraid to get that answer, “Oh, it’s $10,000,” and you’re like, oh, that’s not in my price range. I mean, I just don’t even think I could ask another artist. It’s crazy sometimes. So that’s why I thought I’ll put a price on this and see if anybody’s interested. And it sold within five or 10 minutes. And I was like, well, that was really cool. So I just continued to do that. And I think that was one of my — it was a resin piece and I called it geode, and it’s like an art panel, and it’s stained glass and it’s resin and it’s different pigments and metallics and things like that. And so it was a geode.

Tim Church: And how much was your first piece that you sold on Instagram? How much did you sell it for?

Stephanie Roberts: It was $150.

Tim Church: $150. And how much did that first piece, like in terms of the materials, how much did it cost you to build that particular piece? And then how long did it take you to make it?

Stephanie Roberts: I would say in material cost, probably under $40. I’m thinking as for time, it probably took me five or six hours because it was one of my first ones I had ever made, so everything was troubleshooting and figuring out how to do this and that, which is something I can do a lot quicker after, you know, 100 of those at this point. But yeah. So I really wasn’t doing a cost analysis on my hourly wage or anything like that. I just thought there’s nobody that’s going to want to spend more than $150 probably. Nobody is even going to want to spend $150. That’s what I’m going to price it at because I was happy to keep it. And if nobody wanted it, I was happy to keep it. So yeah, that probably wasn’t my best cost analysis. But it was still great. It was still a profit, and it kind of went on from there.

Tim Church: I mean, that’s really exciting. So what’s going through your head, though, either in the moments before you put it up to say you’re putting it up for sale or even the week or the month before you decided to do that. What’s going through your mind?

Stephanie Roberts: You could probably ask my husband because I talk a lot, but he’s probably not listening. But I mean, at that point, I was like this is really cool. I could make more of these and I could do this and if I had so many a week, it would equal this. You know, it’s probably like, OK sure, but how many people are going to buy these? But you know, in my head I was just like, I’m going to make more and I’m going to put more price on them. I’m going to see if people want to commission these. Still not in the frame of mind like oh, this is going to be a full-time career. But a side hustle, yes. Did I need a side hustle? No. But I was, you know, I loved what I was doing. And if people were going to pay me to do it, that’s all the better reason why I would do it and, you know, not be helping with cooking or cleaning in the house or something. You know, it gives you more reason to do this hobby when you’re getting paid for it. You feel a little bit better about spending your time on it. So yeah, it wasn’t much later — I think that was about like October of that year. And this was 2018. And by November or December, I had made what I went viral for is the pill petri, which is on coasters, resin coasters, with over-the-counter medications in them. And I had put those — I just shared a picture of them on a pharmacy moms group, and I got more orders than I could handle. You know?

Tim Church: Wow.

Stephanie Roberts: It was kind of near Christmastime and everybody wanted them either for themselves or for a friend. And I mean, I’m not saying it was a million orders by any means, but I wasn’t prepared to even make 50 at a time at that point. And you know, maybe I had an order for 100. So that was pretty cool.

Tim Church: That had to been awesome to really validate that what you were doing was something that was very desirable that people wanted.

Stephanie Roberts: Yeah. It was really exciting. I mean, I still, still didn’t — I was not in the frame of mind that this was going to go anywhere, that I would keep creating and I would probably still sell on the side always, maybe people would ask me to do commissions and different work, and I was happy to do it. But it was a dream. Sure, you could ask me, “Would you want to do this full-time?” Yes. But I mean, that was a big dream. It didn’t feel like reality that that could happen.

Tim Church: Do you think that because you just focused on the art and using it as a creative outlet, something that you enjoy doing without the initial intention of monetizing, do you think that that mindset has eventually helped you along the way as to where you are now in terms of making, actually earning income from it?

Stephanie Roberts: Oh yeah. 100%. I don’t think I could have started out saying, “I want to do this for money,” and went anywhere with it. It was because I loved it, it was a passion, I was learning from other artists on the Internet and wanting to do what they did. You know, different techniques and stuff. And I mean, I worked on a lot of things that just went straight into the garbage. You know? It was just for fun. Yeah, I don’t — if I had started out this was all about money and this was all, you know, I don’t think I would have went anywhere with it.

Tim Church: So talk a little bit about what the actual products that you’re selling, you went into it a little bit with the petri dishes, but obviously we’re on a podcast so need to be as descriptive as possible. We’ll definitely share some pictures once this gets posted. But can you talk a little bit about what you’re actually creating? What’s selling the most? What’s the most popular?

Stephanie Roberts: Yeah, sure. So probably earlier — this timeframe that we’re talking about, it was earlier that summer I was working with the epoxy resin, which is a liquid that you mix and then you pour and then it cures to a hard clear kind of glass-like or acrylic end result. And being the dork that I am, I had some pills around, over-the-counter medicines, and I was like, wouldn’t this be so funny? So I put the medications into — it’s a silicone mold that you put your resin into if you’re using a mold. And I made a coaster out of them. It’s like a 4-inch diameter coaster, and it just looks like the pills are suspended in the resin. It takes a few layers to do this. So I had made that that summer, I posted pictures of it. Again, I wasn’t doing any prices back then, so it’s not like anybody even asked about, “Hey, can I buy this?” And it was later that year that — I don’t even remember, I don’t know what the genesis of it was, why I decided hey, I should make a bunch of these. But for some reason, maybe it was just being in that pharmacist moms group, I thought, this could be something that other dorks like me — and I’m just kidding — but you know, other pharmacy nerds might like too. So you know, I put it out there, this is what I’m doing if anybody would like it. And it was very well received. So those are kind of like coasters, like I said, and then I make a little bigger 6-inch diameter. It came about several months later, and I put letters and words and funny quotes in those. And I put funny quotes in the coasters now too. So a lot of customers will — especially in the beginning when I had more time to take requests, they would request, “Hey, could you do this with pink? Can you do this with black? Can you do it with glitter?” And I was happy to do anything anybody asked for. And then every time I would post a picture, there would be 300 other people that agreed with that person, man, we really want them in that color too. And it always led to a new variation of what we call the pill petri. And so now there’s maybe four or five different colors or glitters or clear, whatever, pill petris that I do. And somebody’s always asking for something different. But besides just the pill petri, I still do what I call the geodes, which are wall panels that you put on the wall and those are the resin and the stained glass and the crystals. I do these ocean pieces. Some people send me shells that they’ve collected on family vacations, things like that, and I’ve included the shells in their ocean art. And again, that’s with resin. And then it looks really realistic and pretty cool, I think. But I’ve also done pill art that hangs on the wall as well. So I kind of jump all around, which is exactly what my ADD loves is doing a little bit of everything. And honestly, what I went viral for, the pill petri, can start to feel like a manufacturing process after a while. It doesn’t really get my creative juices flowing all the time, and while it’s my bread and butter, I really try to do some other things in between to really feel like I’m using my full potential, whatever that is. But yeah. A little bit of everything. I still paint, I still have requests for paintings. I have a commission list that’s into March at the moment for a wall art that’s not just the pill coasters that I get recognized the most for. But there’s still a lot of people requesting wall art of different kinds, whatever that may be, the geodes, the oceans, paintings, pill art. Yeah. It’s kind of wild.

Tim Church: Yeah. I was going to ask you, because I feel like every time I check out your Instagram profile — which is awesome, by the way — I mean, even if you’re not going to purchase anything, I think you need to just go and visit it because you’re going to have a lot of fun. And there’s so many cool designs that are on there, some of which appear to be edible. But they are not, correct?

Stephanie Roberts: Thank you, yes. Yeah, those would be the textured paintings that I love to do. And I use piping bags like you would if you were decorating a cake to make a lot of the ones that you’re talking about that edible with the flowers and things like that and pellet knives and things. But yeah, I just, I love art that looks like it’s just jumping off the wall.

Tim Church: But some of the petri dishes, they actually have real candy in there as part of the design, right?

Stephanie Roberts: Oh, yeah. Right. Yeah, no, I have the candy coasters and things too. And I’m even collaborating soon with a big sprinkle company because the sprinkles I think have been my favorite, which is kind of full circle in my life just because I’m addicted to sweets and sugar. I wish I wasn’t, but I am. And I grew up loving ice cream just covered with sprinkles, almost as many sprinkles as you had ice cream. And I would get gallons — I mean, just huge containers of it in my stocking for Christmas. That was like a gift my parents — I remember my grandmother giving me sprinkles as a gift. I mean, that was a gift that people would give me. I mean, that says you have an addiction, right there. But so it’s kind of cool that’s full circle that I’m doing the coasters with the sprinkles and other candy in them and things like that because truly, that’s just who I am, addicted to sugar. So that’s kind of fun for me too, just another side of my personality to be using in art as well.

Tim Church: So one of the things I noticed, I feel like every time I go to your profile and I go on your shopify, everything is sold out. So I was going to ask you, what’s going on with that?

Stephanie Roberts: Well, it’s really funny you say that. But I usually have a shop opening and I’ve kind of — it’s kind of become a Sunday tradition and I’ve kind of stuck with that Sunday, it kind of worked for me, at 9 p.m., I don’t know, it just worked out to be a good time. And no matter how much I put in the shop, it sells out in two minutes or less. And it’s crazy. But people still ask me like, can’t you just have your shop open all the time and just take orders all the time? Or somebody will say, “Can’t you get a real website?” And I’m just like, I don’t know what a real website is versus my shopify account, but it’s not going to increase how much product I have to sell, which I don’t think always registers with people. But if I just had it open to take, you know, requests too, I don’t know how to humbly say this, but I mean, it would be a year’s worth of orders because I can see how many people are on there at shop time when it opens versus how many people get an order through. And you know, they want to take preorders and things like that, and I don’t want for their safety and for mine, I don’t want to take preorders that are six months in advance, which some people say they’re willing to wait when you don’t know what could happen in life, happen to me, happen to my family, my house. I don’t want to hold your money in preorder status. So I like to just sell either what I have or what I can make within the week. And it seems to be working out really, really well. Right before Christmastime, about a month before Christmas, was my biggest preorder I ever did just so people would know whether they got an order in or if they should be shopping for something else if it was a gift for somebody. And that’s why I did it at that time. So it was in November, and I took how many orders I guesstimated I could do in the month before Christmas, and I was exhausted. And even then with to me, the huge amount that I put in the shop, it was still sold out in two minutes.

Tim Church: Wow.

Stephanie Roberts: So that’s just — it’s just — I mean, it’s crazy.

Tim Church: I mean, that’s incredible. That’s incredible. I was wondering if this was like a marketing tactic you were using. But it actually is the fact that you would be too overwhelmed with the amount of orders that’s coming through, which is — I think it’s a good problem to have, right?

Stephanie Roberts: Yeah. I never in 1 million years would I ever dream I had this problem. I mean, in my most earnest hopes and desires, I was like, oh, I think I could push out this many a week and that equates to this much money and that’s almost equal to pharmacy. And oh, we could cut back on things and I could become a full-time artist. I mean, never, ever, ever, ever, did I think this would be “a problem” that I would have that things would sell out. So and that — just to back up, I know I’m jumping everywhere. But last July, things changed when somebody on Instagram shared the art she had purchased. And her Instagram name is @thingsIboughtandliked. And when she bought it from me, I didn’t know who she was. But apparently she was the Oprah of Instagram. And when she shared — I mean, she only shares things that she purchased with her own money and she likes it. That’s the title of her Instagram, that’s exactly what she does. When she shared it, my life completely changed. That night, I had probably — oh gosh, I don’t know because I never did get through all the messages — like 400 or 500 messages. She shared about 9 p.m. my time. She’s in Texas. At 4 a.m., I decided to go to bed after answering as many messages as I could because I thought, well, this is the only rush I’ll ever get in my life. Like I better take every message and every order I could. But even by 4 a.m., I hadn’t got through even half of the orders. And so from her sharing that, I mean, thank God for her. That’s when life changed. So that was in July, and by maybe a month — not even a month later — I had talked to my manager about going down to one day a week and becoming a full-time artist. It was that life-changing. It was crazy.

Tim Church: Wow. So at that point when she shared that, how many hours were you working?

Stephanie Roberts: I was a 30-hour pharmacist at that point. So I was working three 10-hour days a week, which is amazing. And back when I took that — so when I started at UK, I was your regular 5 day a week, 40-hour person, kind of banker’s hours. And then a few years into it, they knew I was interested in going to 30 hours, which is still full-time benefits, and that’s what I took on. And at that point, I was doing some more art on the side, and it was like oh, this is great. I’ll have more time for art and just feeling like the human that I want to be, a little bit of everything. And if I’m going to be a good mom, obviously that was more time for kids too. So you know, it was — everything was great. But so I was 30 hours when she changed my life. And yeah. I realized burning the candle at both ends, I wasn’t sleeping, I was working around the clock to fulfill these orders, you know, it was — self-care didn’t happen for like four months. It was crazy. So I knew something had to end. Either I had to just give it up and I can’t be the person that can fulfill all these orders or I can, and I’ve got to let go of pharmacy, which was very scary when the whole family is on my insurance because the hospital has amazing insurance and benefits and things like that. And my husband has benefits, but you just can’t compare to how awesome the hospital benefits are. So it was scary, and it was something we had to weigh as a family and what we’re losing, what we’re gaining, pretty cool to be at home whenever the kids do need me because definitely the mom guilt has added up over the years. Every time they’re sick, my husband’s job is he has the best job ever and he’s flexible and he can be there for them. But man, it really hurts when you can’t be there when they’re sick. So now I can. I can be there for the kids and just so many other benefits. So that’s where we are. And I have the most supportive husband — this would never happen without the husband I have. Like I can imagine there’s a good percentage out there that would kind of be like, let it go, Stephanie. You know, you’ve got a great job — which I did. Pharmacy was great. Let’s count our blessings, let’s move on with what we have. But he’s been really supportive, and I’ve had some really pie in the sky dreams, and he’s just kind of like, go for it. I think you can do it. And without him, again, I just — without support, I don’t know how you could do it. So I’m thankful for that too. And he’s had to — when I was saying that I was burning the candle on both ends, I mean, he’s a wonderful father. But he really had to step up his game even more and really do a lot of the home things with the kids and everything it takes to run a family and a home. And he enabled me to be able to just devote everything I could to both jobs and stuff. So pretty awesome.

Tim Church: Yeah, I mean, that’s just wild how one post, and a bazillion orders come through and everything changes and no longer is pharmacy your full-time gig but now it becomes the other way around. And I think for a lot of people, that maybe they want to make that transition or do that change, but there’s obviously a lot of fear that goes behind that. Like you mentioned, obviously the healthcare benefits, that’s one, and being able to afford healthcare when that’s something that’s part of your employer benefit package. But then also, are you going to continue to get orders like that? Is it going to continue to have a demand? Or is it a one-time spurt like that? I think that probably had to be going through your mind at that time as you’re making that decision with your husband with how you’re going to proceed.

Stephanie Roberts: Oh yeah. I mean, looking back at it, I don’t really know how we made that decision. Why did we really think it would continue? I don’t know. I mean, there was kind of markers where you’d say, yeah, it looks like people will continue. But we didn’t know. This was only a few months later, but I still look back and think, why did we really think it was safe to make that jump? I don’t know, but thank God it was. And it’s continued to be — it probably took me 10 shop openings to be like, you know, every time before it opens, are people still going to be there? Are they still going to shop? Are they still going to buy things? And now I feel confident they’re going to be there because they’re in my DMs, they’re in my messages, they’re saying, “When is the next shop opening?” And I feel confident. And I might even feel confident like that it will continue for a year, but I don’t know what the future holds. I’m hopeful. But like I said before, and maybe this was while we weren’t recording, but you know, I hate to let go of pharmacy in case I need to get back into it. It’s an amazing safety net. I can’t think of a lot of people, you know, that I’ve learned about over the years, amazing authors and artists of every variation that have held onto their side job for as long as they could while they were still trying to make it. I don’t know of any side job that was as great as pharmacy is, so it was — I mean, I’m so happy that’s my safety net, even if I had to go back to the trenches of some retail pharmacy that I would prefer not to work in. It’s still a blessing, it’s still there, it’s still wonderful. So yeah. I just kind of pinch myself every day that this is happening.

Tim Church: I mean, it’s incredible. I mean, I just, I’m sitting here behind the mic like, I’m just so fascinated and intrigued with your story and how you made that jump but also how you continue to make it happen and just the demand being there. I mean, it’s just wild. So I think a lot of people are probably thinking, alright, Stephanie, you basically said you’re crushing it right now. You can’t even hold your shop open for more than a couple minutes before you sell out of your business. Can you give us just an estimate — I mean, how much are you actually earning in the business? And is it comparable to what you were making full-time as a pharmacist?

Stephanie Roberts: I think my husband wishes I was a little bit better with numbers and keeping up with things like that, but Shopify and having that online presence has really helped me to see that and see my profits and, you know, tax season is going to be really interesting this year as we figure out what we’re doing with a new business. But after this year, hopefully we are more informed about everything we need to do better next year. But yeah, it’s doing better than pharmacy. I think I would have made that jump even if it was maybe doing a little bit less than pharmacy. I think we could have handled that in our finances. I have, again, my husband has a Master’s in business and education that I don’t even understand. But you know, so he’s wonderful to have around. I call him the CFO. But yeah, it’s doing better than pharmacy, which is a huge surprise. I would go ahead and estimate that it’s going to be over six figures this year. And I mean, that’s pretty cool. I don’t know that I could ask for more. So —

Tim Church: I mean, that’s incredible right there because I mean, I know there’s a lot of people that obviously are doing — designing art and doing creative works. And I think they dream of even getting remotely close to what you’re making. And so the fact that you’ve been able to do it and replicate the process and continue to have — there’s a need out there, obviously, for people that want your designs. I mean, that’s just incredible.

Stephanie Roberts: It is incredible because who would have even thought outside of the pharmacy network I was going to find an audience for pill petri? But I mean, it far surpasses just people in the medical field anymore. I mean, there’s all the nice, fancy blog influencers, I mean, Instagram influencers and things like that. Again, other people buy it and then share it. And it’s — I would have never imagined that somebody that wasn’t in pharmacy or medicine period would want these. So I mean, yeah, just crazy. And I feel humbled by it but also feel like gosh, I look at some people that are just so talented and I wonder if their sales are like this or they’re close to this and things like that. I don’t feel worthy of it. But it’s — I’m grateful. And it’s been a really fun ride. So yeah. I put my time in at least. I may not be as wonderfully talented as they are, but I have definitely worked my butt off. I can say that. I have put the time in for sure.

Tim Church: It’s easy to tell that. And like you said, coming from your initial motivations for even pursuing art were way beyond the ability to monetize it. So I mean, I think that’s really cool. Now obviously, you’re the secret sauce of the business and creating these awesome designs. But does anybody help you with different aspects of it?

Stephanie Roberts: I have been bringing in more people, and they are to help with it. Like I said, the coasters at this point are — it’s almost like manufacturing. We make hundreds a week, and it is probably more time-intensive than anybody ever assumes when it comes to how many layers of resin you pour and putting the pills in, creating the capsules we make with the glitter and the sprinkles inside, I mean, I have thousands of those we make. So it’s not just buying over-the-counter drugs, but it’s making the glitter capsules that are kind of, again, the secret sauce that people are just like, where do you buy those? We don’t buy them. We make them. So the people I have helping me, funny enough, are technicians I’ve recruited, interns I’ve recruited, and somebody just started for me recently as one of my fellow pharmacist’s daughters. So it’s been kept close to home. I hope to hire somebody really full-time and, you know, become more of an assistant. I always tell people when I say, “Do you want to come over and help?” I mean, obviously, they get reimbursed. But you know, it’s not the most fun. But you know, we try to make it fun. It’s just time-consuming and we listen to our podcasts and we watch TV on the iPad or do whatever. So we keep it as lively as we can. And it’s not boring. It’s not the most fun. But it’s, you know, it’s better than on your worst day in pharmacy for sure. You know, the days when insurance is down and you know the customers don’t understand that and somebody’s sick and the very worst days, you’re like, yeah, you know, at my worst I may be a little bit bored on some occasions. But yeah, it’s still pretty great. I like the day-to-day

Tim Church: What about an accountant or a lawyer to help with some of the legal issues with the business? Anything — any of those people supporting you?

Stephanie Roberts: Well, I don’t have a lawyer that I have kept on staff or anything like that. But in the beginning, before we jumped this as a full-time career, my husband said, “You really need to figure out if this is legal. Legal, legal, legal.” I had kind of already been doing it, but he’s just like, you can’t jump to this full-time — and I had researched it on my own as much as I could to make sure everything was OK. So I think I contacted three different pharmacy lawyers that I knew of. So they were pharmacists plus attorneys. And they were all gracious enough — I mean, just on a friend basis looking into it for me. And nobody could find any reason why this would be, you know, illegal. Again, they’re over-the-counter medications, there’s no prescription medications in there. People shouldn’t be able to get — I mean, to get into the resin to get into a medication, you would have to use a drill. And by the time you got down to the pill, it’s going to be obliterated. So you know, good luck trying to get that Tylenol out of there to take it, but I don’t think it’s going to hurt anybody.

Tim Church: I was going to go for the Sour Patch Kid or the Swedish fish.

Stephanie Roberts: Oh, OK. Yeah, I mean, just swallow the coaster whole. That would probably easier to do than to get down to those. And on the gummies too, I mean, I’ve covered those with like shellac-type substances. So yeah. You’re not going to want them. So definitely have an accountant that will be helping us with our first tax season as a sole proprietorship this year. Plan on becoming an LLC. Should have done that last year, but time definitely got away from me. LLC I think would be much more beneficial. But yes, an accountant is a must. I don’t think we would do this on our own. Not yet. Maybe in the future. Probably not. But — and I hope I never need a lawyer, other than the initial, “Hey, is this legal?” I hope I don’t need another one for any reason.

Tim Church: But one of the things along the lines I was going to ask was, do you have any patents or other protections on your designs?

Stephanie Roberts: I have looked into patents, and patents on art are pretty difficult. You can get them, but then you have to enforce them. And when I get into something, I really — I get into 175%. So I have done every online course and researched other entrepreneurs in every field and even people like — I think it’s Sarah Blakely that does the Spanx brand. As a male, I don’t know if you’re aware, but I mean, Spanx is a huge brand. So maybe at this point you know what that is. But I mean, even on her designs, she said she had patents and people were ripping it off here and there. And she’s like, you know, I didn’t have enough time, I didn’t care enough, really, to go after every one of them. I just was focused on what I was doing. And that girl is into making billions these days. So there’s a lot of stories kind of like hers that make me believe there’s copycats. I already have copycats. And I try to just see it as flattery. They’re not doing as much. But —

Tim Church: Their shops are open, right?

Stephanie Roberts: Yeah, yeah, their shops are open all the time, just like — yeah, exactly. But yeah, I think I’m just going to keep my blinders on and keep trying to do what I’m doing and always stay ahead of them. That’s kind of one thing, it’s kind of motivated me to always stay ahead and be thinking of more, not to get comfortable or same like, you know, looking ahead, maybe we could assume I have some business in the future. But let’s not always assume. Let’s just work and earn that business and keep your clientele and keep the customers coming back for more. So it has motivated me in that way to not get comfortable and say, this is easy-peasy from here on out. No. I need to always be doing more. So that’s pretty cool.

Tim Church: So Stephanie, what advice would you give other pharmacists out there who have other interests and passions beyond pharmacy that maybe have the potential to be monetized?

Stephanie Roberts: I don’t know if I would say, jump into it. But you can do it. I mean, I just, I really think if you have a passion and a will — I saw this quote I think just two days ago, and it’s so simple. But it just really hit home for me, and it was just like, “I don’t know how, but I’m going to do it.” I mean, it was something like that. But I don’t know how, but I’ll make it happen. And it’s just like yeah, that’s exactly what it is. I don’t always know the how, but I’m going to figure it out and I’m going to do it. And I think anybody can. I think as I’ve entered my 30s and the more I’ve listened to and digested all these wonderful podcasts that exist that interview all these amazing entrepreneurs and people doing — it’s just like, you can do it. I mean, it’s amazing you can do it, how you can think outside the box and really make it happen. Growing up, I just really didn’t do that. It just seemed like degree all the way and that’s all you can do. And now I really want to educate my kids on — I mean, college is wonderful and I hope they go to college, but there’s so much more outside of that with being creative thinkers and finding a solution to a problem and that’s how some of the best inventions are made. I would just say if you’re really into it and you have a passion for it, do it. I don’t think money is always the best motivator. I think after awhile, you would get — you’re going to be exhausted and give up if it’s only about the money because I know from experience if this had only been about the money, oh, I would have given up a long time ago. It’s been exhausting. It’s been hard. But like I said, with three little kids at home, it’s not been easy. But I wanted it. So I kept on going. And I went days with only three hours of sleep every night. And that really takes a toll on you. But I wanted it. So I was going to keep on going. And I don’t think if you’re doing it only for the money that you would push through all the time. So you know, if you find something you’re passionate about, go for it.

Tim Church: I love that. Well said, Stephanie. Well thank you so much for coming on the show, sharing your story, really looking forward to hear how you continue to just explode this business. And I look forward to the day when you’re shop’s open and possibly I can order something for my wife. But also I like the coasters too, so even though you said you’re catering to a lot of women out there, I definitely think that there’s some really cool designs that you’ve done, especially if you’re a pharmacist or have that background that are really cool to have in your house. So I would encourage you to check out some of the designs. So if someone wants to reach out to you or learn more about what you’re doing and Art by Stephanie, what’s the best place to go?

Stephanie Roberts: Well thank you so much. And I have made some male designs for some male pharmacists and some doctors that did not have glitter pills in them. That’s all it takes. You just subtract those out, and it’s a male coaster. But Instagram is the best place to find me, and it’s pretty simple, but it’s @artbystephanieroberts. And you can get everything you need from there. The link is in the profile for my shop. Again, that’s most Sundays. But you know, @artbystephanieroberts on Instagram, you can find my email from there. And that’s really the place to go.

Tim Church: Thank you for listening to this episode. And as always, if you liked the content and want to hear more side hustle and pharmacist entrepreneur stories, please leave us a review on the Apple podcasts app or whatever player you use so we can get the message out and help other pharmacists on their financial journey. Just a reminder, if you want to win some of Stephanie’s art, follow @YourFinancialPharmacist and @artbystephanieroberts on Instagram and then comment on our audiogram post that’s going to be posted on Instagram Friday, March 13. And you’ve got one week to do this, and we will announce the winner the following week on Friday, March 20.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 142: Scripting Your Dream Career with Dr. Adam Martin


Scripting Your Dream Career with Dr. Adam Martin

Dr. Adam Martin joins Tim Ulbrich on the show to discuss his most recent book Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career.

Dr. Martin is the founder of The Fit Pharmacist, host of The Fit Pharmacist Healthcare Podcast and a two-time author.

About Today’s Guest

Dr. Adam Martin works with people to write their script for success using proper nutrition, stress management, and the power of a positive attitude. He earned his doctorate of pharmacy degree from the University of Pittsburgh School of Pharmacy, and with over 7 years of experience working full-time in the community pharmacy setting, he’s passionate about empowering other pharmacists and pharmacy students to put the health back into healthcare through leading by example in their professional practice to not only live their best lives, but to inspire others along the way to do the same. He pairs his PharmD with his expertise as a certified personal trainer and nutrition consultant to guide self-care back into healthcare.

Dr. Martin is the founder of The Fit Pharmacist, LLC. As a National Speakers Association (NSA) Professional Speaker, Adam’s core passion is traveling to pharmacy schools across the world to speak to pharmacy students, sharing practical plans of action that will empower them to maximize their careers and create a competitive edge in the profession to maximize their success and degree of impact.

He has made his life’s work showing people how to take control of their overall wellness, sharing SimpleSolutions through his writing for numerous pharmacy publications including PharmacyTimes magazine, and is the author of the best-selling book Rx: You: The Pharmacist’s Survival Guide for Managing Stress & Fitting in Fitness as well as the forthcoming book Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career.

He is the host of The Fit Pharmacist Healthcare Podcast, sharing successes and practical strategies from the most successful minds in the profession of pharmacy with a new episode released every week. You can subscribe and learn more here: https://thefitpharmacist.com/podcast

With a passion for learning and serving his patients, he’s an inaugural member of the Pennsylvania Pharmacists Association’s Leadership Excellence and Advocacy Development (LEAD) program, and strives to serval the global community of pharmacy as a medical missionary, having served in Honduras and Panama as a pharmacist in the field. In 2019, he was named the “Most Influential Pharmacist” by SingleCare’s Best of the Best Pharmacy Awards.

You can connect with him on Instagram

Twitter / Facebook / LinkedIn: @FitPharmFam

YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/thefitpharmacist

Summary

In this episode, Dr. Adam Martin digs into his reason for writing his most recent book the Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career and key points in it.

Adam explains that the number one problem he heard other pharmacists say was that they were never taught how to be a pharmacist. Although they were extensively trained in medicine and other essential knowledge that lays the PharmD groundwork, they didn’t know how to enter the workforce, interact with their colleagues, develop their career, or attend conferences. Essentially, pharmacists entering the workforce already felt behind.

Adam identified this problem and knew that something needed to be done. He’s very passionate about giving back to pharmacy programs and wanted to make a lasting impact on students. He decided to focus on what isn’t taught in a PharmD program but needs to be known. Over a four year period, Adam wrote his second book, Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career.

The book is divided into two parts. The first part is about your prescription to dominate pharmacy school. Topics like clarifying your why, molding your mindset and networking are discussed. Part two delves into how to script your career. This section consists of 22 expert interviews with some of the best pharmacists in their niche. In this section, pharmacy students ask seasoned pharmacists what they would have done differently in the pharmacy school and their career to get to where they are today but faster.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. I’m excited to welcome Dr. Adam Martin back on the show to talk about his most recent book, “Gen Z Pharmacist: Dominate pharmacy school and script your dream career.” Dr. Martin was previously on the show back on Episode 091 with Tim Church as a part of our side hustle series where he talked about how to become a fit pharmacist. Now, for those who don’t already know Adam, honestly, I’m not really sure how that’s the case as he’s everywhere having a positive impact, now internationally as well on so many so early in his career. His mindset, positivity and energy for helping inspire others to be the best version of themselves is second to none. I’ve been blessed to get to know Adam over the past couple years, and he’s inspired me and I’m confident will do the same for those listening today. Adam, welcome back to the show.

Adam Martin: Dr. Tim, it is a pleasure to be back, my man.

Tim Ulbrich: So glad to have you. It’s great to have you back in front of the YFP community, and it’s an exciting time for you with the recent book launch we’ll talk more about on the show as well as getting back from an international speaking gig. Tell us more.

Adam Martin: Yeah, man, so that was a blast. I actually just got back from speaking in Ireland at two pharmacy schools. So I was invited to speak on a mental health symposium in the city of Cork, Ireland. So flew into Dublin and then drove to Cork. And in Ireland, there’s three schools of pharmacy. So a little background: The healthcare system in Ireland is roughly three years behind that of the rest of the world. So just to paint a scenario for you, if someone has a mental health crisis, let’s say they have suicidal thoughts and they go to their provider, at that point, there is a 6-8 week waiting period for them to get any kind of treatment.

Tim Ulbrich: Gees.

Adam Martin: That paired with the fact that there’s a lot of stigma and no one’s talking about mental health is what’s prompted the creation of this symposium. So I was invited to speak. It was the first time ever in the country. All three schools of pharmacy were there. There were about 250 pharmacy students from the country. I spoke along with psychiatrists and pharmacists doing groundbreaking research to advance mental health. And it was the first time that there was a gathering to talk about mental health resources available and how to break down that stigma and lead to a positive impact. And the other thing that was fun — and I didn’t know this until shortly before the talk — is Irish people tend to be somewhat reserved. So they’re not used to my speaking style, and if you ever heard me speak, it is not a talk. It is an experience.

Tim Ulbrich: You bring it. You bring it.

Adam Martin: Yes. So I get everyone engaged, I get literally people up dancing in the talk. So they — the words that they used was “bloody brilliant.”

Tim Ulbrich: Bloody brilliant.

Adam Martin: It was a blast, man. And then I went the next day to speak at Trinity College at Dublin all about self-care, specifically for combating burnout that we’re facing in our profession because we hear about that all the time here in the States, but this is something that’s global. So it was an honor to be a voice representing pharmacy from the United States to talk about that in Ireland and bring what I’ve been working on here over there.

Tim Ulbrich: What an awesome experience. I mean, we talk about opportunity meeting the interest, the passion you have, the impact that you want to have. But just to be able to have that experience in Ireland, I followed you on Instagram throughout that journey. It looked like you were having a blast while you were there. So not only that, but you’ve got a second book out as well. I mean, how does that feel? We’ll reflect more on the details of the book and some of the concepts in there, but man, as you’re on the back end, the journey of writing a book is intense. I’ve joked with many, I’ve done it one, I’m not sure I’m going to do it again.

Adam Martin: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: But you’ve done it twice now. I mean, how does it feel to be on the back end of it?

Adam Martin: Oh man, so this actually is a funny — it leads me to a podcast that I did with a really world-renowned author. His name is Michael Lozier. And if you ever heard of the law of attraction, there’s a book called “Law of Attraction.” And it is a phenomenal read about mindset. But when I was interviewing him, I said, “Oh, I love your book. I’ve read it like five times, listened to it.” And he’s like, “Oh, that’s funny. I wrote it 100 times.” And at the time, I laughed. But after writing my second book, I was like, that is so true. So yeah, man, it’s a lot of revision and that’s really what people need to know is if you’re thinking about writing a book, really doing anything, the first draft is going to be trash. So you have to get started and dive into that process. And it’s fun. You learn, you get insight as you go. But that won’t happen until you get started. So that’s my learning experience and turned into piece of advice for anyone considering going down that path.

Tim Ulbrich: I think that’s great advice, and I think for many that have the aspirations of writing a book, they see a finished product and they think, oh my gosh, it’s so overwhelming, I’m never going to get there. But as you and I both know, to your point, the first draft often you look back at and you’re like, what was I thinking? You know, in terms of what I had here. But just the small compound effect, you write a few hundred words a day, you keep at it, and you get a draft on paper, you make revisions, you get feedback from others, and you start to refine your message and see what’s resonating.

Adam Martin: Absolutely.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about the book in detail. Again, the title is “Gen Z Pharmacist: Dominate pharmacy school and script your career.” Our listeners can learn more and get a copy at FitPharmacist.com/book. Now, three things that I love about this book as I had a chance to get a sneak preview from Adam: No. 1 — and I’ve shared this with you already — I think it’s really written in a way that is easy to understand, it’s digestable, and it’s written by someone who really has been through this journey. You know, you’ve walked the walk. And I think you’re doing a great job of teaching it. And I think it’s written in a way that it’s action-oriented is really the second piece that I love is that you can’t blow through this book. I think you’ve done a really nice job of you’re talking about some big things in the text in terms of mindset, you talk about leadership and time management, all these different concepts, and you really do a great job of forcing the reader to stop, reflect, and actually have space in the book where they can do some activities to think about that. I thought that was awesome. And then the second part of the book, which you called “Script Your Career: Experts speak,” you’ve got I think 20-something I think different experts that you have examples and stories from that I think really just showcases not only the journey you’ve had but also others. And so the thought that went behind this, you know, I think often when I see people that publish multiple books, you think, man, what are they pumping out? How quick are they doing it? What’s the quality? The intentionality here was awesome, and I think you did a really wonderful job. And I’m excited to talk more about this. So let’s start with why. What was the need? I mean, you’ve got your first book that was out, I see a copy in the book here as we’re recording.

Adam Martin: Yeah, there it is.

Tim Ulbrich: What’s the need for a second book? What was the mission and the vision?

Adam Martin: Absolutely. So first off, thank you for the kind words, Tim. I really appreciate that. It means a lot coming from you. I have tremendous respect for you and all the work that you’ve done and the impact you’re making for pharmacy. And I think that’s why you and I resonate so well and why we’re joining forces, sneak preview, for something coming up later in the spring. But to answer your question, so I’ve worked first as a nutrition consultant, and I’ve been doing that since 2013. And my niche is pharmacy students and pharmacists. And you know, we talk about problems, struggles, things like that. And the No. 1 problem that I kept hearing was very similar to what we all faced when we graduated. And that is I was never taught how to be a pharmacist. Yes, I was taught all the knowledge and all of the medication information and all those essentials that laid the groundwork for what our PharmD is for. But when it comes time to actually entering the workforce, interacting with your colleagues and then also developing your career in an increasingly competitive industry, how do you leverage social media? And then there’s all this talk about personal branding. Oh yeah, and then there’s conferences. And then there’s all that stuff that you’re not taught about in a structured way. And you get out in the workforce and then you feel behind. And something that’s something that people were struggling with a lot. So I thought, man, something needs to be done about this. So you asked why a second book, but the fun fact is I actually started working on this book before my first book came out. So this book was a four-year process because I do work full-time in the community and run a business. So time was interesting. But as far as the reason why, that comes to innovation. And that’s a core belief and a core concept at University of Pittsburgh School of Pharmacy, where I graduated, that being innovation, leadership, and excellence. So whenever I graduated, if you guys know my story, I was quite on the struggle bus to even get into pharmacy school.

Tim Ulbrich: Last seat, right? Last seat.

Adam Martin: Yeah. Last seat. Last one to get in, and no one in my class knew it. But I ended up being president of my class and all that other stuff. But because of that, and I worked so hard to get in, I was tremendously grateful for the opportunity and I had just such an amazing learning experience with phenomenal faculty and just great networking. So when I graduated, I started to think, man, I really need to give back. Like I need to get involved. So I started guest lecturing and helping some of my professors here and there. But working full-time, I would only be able to get in like when my schedules aligned, like once a semester. So that wasn’t really making a huge impact. Then I thought well, they asked for contributions financially, which is great, but I’m not a gazillionaire yet. But you know, after reading “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” it’s going to happen. Shameless plug. But you know, I don’t have enough money to make a huge impact with like a building or whatnot. So I thought, you know, how can I put this concept of innovation into practice? So I thought, what am I good at? What do I enjoy? What do people resonate with? And it’s writing and speaking. So I thought about what they don’t teach you in pharmacy school but what everyone needs in order to be a successful pharmacist. So I reached out to the dean and I said, “Hey, I thought about this idea of writing a book to complement pharmacy school. But before I do it, I just want to make sure that this doesn’t exist so I’m not spinning my wheels.” And she said, “No, it doesn’t exist.” So I was like, awesome. Well, what I want to do is I want to write a book helping students on this process so that when they graduate, they have the groundwork to hit the ground running. And what I want to do is reach out to 22 of the best pharmacists in their niche that are really crushing it. So like nuclear pharmacy, administration, dean of pharmacy school, how to get a residency if you want to get a PhD after pharmacy, all of those types of things. And what I want to do is I want to interview them and say right now, you are the best at what you do. And you’ve been doing this for years. If you knew you were going to end where you are now on your first day of pharmacy school, what would you do differently to get there faster? What organizations would you have joined? What publications, what meetings, all of those types of things. And that was my original idea. And she said, “That’s a great idea, but what if instead of you doing the interviews, you have pharmacy students do them so it’s not only a book for pharmacy students but written by pharmacy students.”

Tim Ulbrich: Love it.

Adam Martin: And it sounded great until I realized how to implement that. So you’ve got a dude that’s full-time community — and if you guys work in community, you know how rigid that structure is. I mean, we’ve got to submit our vacation requests like a year and a half advance. So you’ve got that. I’m running a business, diving into my speaking career, OK, and then you’ve got 22 super busy people that are crushing it and then you try to get pharmacy students who are in pharmacy school in leadership positions. So try to align those schedules 22 different times.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Adam Martin: And that turned into four years.

Tim Ulbrich: So Adam, what I hear there is a lot of persistence as well as certainly some good mentorship and folks that gave you insight into the book. But I think that last part, you know, interviewing 20-something folks that are crushing it in their respective careers, honestly, that alone could probably be a separate book, could be a separate resource, could be a separate podcast — not that you have free time. But really getting insights into folks, you know, that’s something that I often wonder is I love the concept of sitting down with somebody and just asking them about you know, what’s made you successful? What’s your routines, your habits? And there’s obviously a lot of networking to be had there but also to learn. And that was really a big takeaway for me as I read this book was man, I wish I would have had this in pharmacy school. I wish I would have had this available to me. I just think it’s an incredible, incredible resource. And I see so many connections between this and the financial piece.

Adam Martin: Oh yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And again, sneak preview, excited we’re going to be collaborating on some things, more things going forward. But in the book — and we’ll talk here in a minute — you talk about clarifying your why and mindset and time management and developing an outside passion and leadership and mentorship and thinking about the long game. And the thread, so much of that for me depends on is your financial situation in a position that you can clearly focus on all of those things? Because what I hear from so many people is, yes, yes, yes, but hey, I’m in $200,000 of debt and I can’t see what’s beyond this $200,000 of debt. And so I think there’s so many connections here to having a sound financial base and having a good financial plan so that you can be able to focus on these things. And so to that point, Chapter 1, which I loved, you started with this concept of clarify your why, which is something we talk about on this show as it relates to one’s financial situation. But tell me more about what you mean in terms of this concept of clarifying your why.

Adam Martin: Absolutely. So with the book, there’s two parts. The second part we talked about are the interviews that we did. So what that is it’s looking Part 1, the concepts we explore and how people in the industry have put those into practice and are thriving because of it. So it’s kind of like, here’s the script and literally Part 1 is “Your Rx to Dominate Pharmacy School.” But then Part 2 is here’s people that did this, and here’s the result. So absolutely. And that comes down to two parts. So we want to impact patients. We want to have a way to help people enrich their lives. We can’t do that until we can do that for ourselves. So that’s why in the first part, there is self-mastery and then relationship building. So the reason that the first chapter is clarify your why is because in order to thrive in your business, in your personal endeavors, whatever that looks like for you, you will face adversity, you will face setbacks.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Adam Martin: Guaranteed.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Adam Martin: And if you only have a short-term goal like “I want to make a ton of money,” or “I want a name for myself” or whatever that is, you will fail every time. But if you have a why that is bigger than yourself, if you have a purpose that extends farther beyond you, you will be able to realign with that and stick through that and do what it takes to overcome those hurdles.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.
Adam Martin: For example, if you’re listening to this and you have kids, alright? When you’re sick, when you are exhausted, when you’ve got projects on the line, but your kid needs help, you do it anyway because it’s something bigger than yourself.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep, absolutely.

Adam Martin: It’s the same concept. So that’s why having a why that is clear, aligned with your goals and is bigger than you, making it about other people instead of just yourself, that’s the secret to staying at the long game because it is a process. And the thing you people have to realize is it’s not — and this is something that’s rampant in our profession being everyone Type A. I mean, I’m so Type A, my name starts with A. So I get it, y’all. Real talk. But you have to realize that it’s not going to be getting it right the first time. You can’t focus on being perfect. And we’re wired to think that way because literally as pharmacists, depending on your role, if you’re dispensing, one mistake could kill someone. That’s reality. So we take that thought process, and it translates into other areas of our life. So you have to shift your focus away from perfection and on progress because it’s a process not a one-and-done, and you have to realize that the value is on progress not perfection.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And if I could even add onto that, you know, Seth Godin, one of my favorite authors, would argue that you want to run from perfection. You want to fail often but quickly. And obviously, there’s places where you don’t want to fail and when you think about medication safety and other things. But you know, in terms of developing yourself as an individual, a road of perfection and a road of no challenges is one of the greatest fears I have for my children.

Adam Martin: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: I don’t want them to have that, you know. They need to have adversity. They need to learn through that because as I reflect back even on a young career, like those moments, being in those, however painful they can be and however significant they seem in the moment, that’s really where the sweetness is happening. And to this concept of why, you know, again, to the listeners, the action-oriented nature of this book, I’m on page 6 here. Here I am, maybe I pick up your book and I feel like I’m just going to fly through this thing. And I’ve got to sit down and reflect on my why. And I can tell you that I recently did this activity to over 100 students in a personal finance course here at Ohio State, and I had them reflect on their why using some of the life planning questions we’ve talked about before on the podcast. And I will tell you through those responses, rarely have people thought about this question. And this is somewhat uncomfortable to think about. I think that’s good, that’s the purpose of the activity, you stop, you reflect. But again, I think it speaks to the nature of this book, you’re not just talking about this concept, you know, here I am on page 6 and I’ve already got to dig in and do some work, which is awesome.

Adam Martin: I love it, man. But yeah, to your point about the action-oriented nature of the book. And I’m an NSA professional speaker. And I tell people this at almost all my talks. I’m not a motivational speaker. I’m not here to pump you up. If you want to get pumped up, go to the gym. I’m here to literally make an impact and get you thinking to change your life and move the needle in the direction so that we can create momentum right now because when I leave, there’s two choices. I leave and a couple days later, you’re right back in your old habits.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Right.

Adam Martin: Or in the moment while I’m with you, we create an action plan so that you can just do simple steps to get the momentum moving. And that’s the key because I’m really good at bringing the energy and getting people in peak states of motivation. But unless you do something with that, nothing’s going to happen. So I took that same concept with the book. I talk about the concepts in simple terms to lay it down. But at the end of every chapter, there is a place to put that into practice specific to you, the reader, because all of us are different. We’re all at different places in our life. I’ve had pharmacists that have been graduated over 15 years saying, this book is starting to change my career. So while it’s catered to pharmacy students, it depends where you are in your career. And this really can impact anyone in the profession.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, and to that point, Adam, I mean, I’ve been out of school for 12 years. And I tried to hang onto my title of “new practitioner” as long as I could, but I don’t think I can use it anymore. But I think there’s something to learn here for everyone. I mean, to me, the mindset is you are always learning. So while I talk about your why all the time or I talk about mindset or time management, like, I don’t have all the answers. I mean, I always have something to learn in these areas. And I think this is another great resource that yes, it’s really geared toward pharmacy students, but I think many can learn beyond that. Now, Chapter 2, Mold Your Mindset. And I want to spend a few minutes talking about this because one of the things I love about you, Adam, is I feel like mindset, mindset, mindset. You know, I had a chance to meet with you in person on a couple occasions, and I strategically brought my son with me one time because I wanted him to see firsthand, you know, he might not be able to articulate it as 7 or 8 years, but being around people like you that have positivity, have mindset, you know, it’s a choice that you make despite circumstances that are around you, you know? It reminds me, I’m coaching first and second graders in basketball right now. And we’re learning a lesson on joy v. happiness.

Adam Martin: Ah.

Tim Ulbrich: And so this mindset thing, I want for a moment, give us some practical tips or strategies because I think you do this so well. And you talk about in the book as well that you’ve used or you’ve seen others successfully implement that helps to mold the mindset. You know, I think we all agree that having this mindset is incredibly important, but what are some things that folks can think about that either worked for you or that have worked for others?

Adam Martin: Absolutely. So it really comes down to what your focus is. So Bruce Lee once said, “As you think, so shall you become.” And it’s really a simple concept, but when you try to apply that to the organized chaos of pharmacy, it doesn’t seem so simple because you’ve got a lot of things. You’ve got doctor calls, you’ve got texts, you’ve got patient questions, you’ve got errors, you’ve got issues, all of that stuff. But you’ve got to put a smile on that face. How are you going to do that when you feel stressed and stretched too thin to even like have time to drink water or eat lunch during a break you don’t get or stand on your feet for 13 hours? How are you going to do that? How are you going to smile? How are you going to make it real? So it really comes down to the focus of how you’re going to conduct yourself at work or in your job and then also outside of work because if you’re having a stressful moment and you need to deal with that, that’s not really practical in the moment at a pharmacy because your patients are your priority.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Adam Martin: But if you don’t put in that work of self-growth and development outside, that’s really where it comes from. So to answer your question, what’s a simple tip? It’s really what you focus on. So in pharmacy, in life, there are two realities. There are things that you can control and there are things that you cannot control. And what we tend to do as Type A pharmacists is we like to just blur that line, like, oh, we’ll figure it out. We’ll make this work. So we’re wired as humans to focus on the negative, that’s what we’re wired to because that’s what kept us alive back in the primal age. And you guys probably listening to this, you probably see this happen. You have a win, something’s checked off the list, and it’s just gone. And now you’re focused on what’s the next problem I need to fix.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Adam Martin: And we get our focus set on problems we can’t fix. And if you just look on Facebook at a lot of the large pharmacy pages, that’s all you see is bickering and complaining about things you can’t necessarily control. And while they’re true and I’m not saying there’s no problems, there’s always room for improvement. And yes, there are some issues that we’re facing in our profession. If you focus on that long enough, that’s exactly what you’re going to get. That’s the mindset you’re going to have. That’s the emotion you’re going to create. And that is the action you’re going to interact with others as. So I’m not saying ignore problems, I’m not saying that if you go out in your garden and you see weeds, you close your eyes and say, “No weeds, no weeds, no weeds!” If you open your eyes, the weeds are still there. You’ve got to get down on your knees and yank those suckers out. But what I am saying is focus on the fact that you have the power to pull those weeds out.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Adam Martin: Focus on what you can control and focus on those wins. Look at where you can make an impact, both in your own life and in the life of your colleagues, partner and your patients.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think this is another great example, Adam, and you go on I think in Chapter 3 or 4 talking about self-care and again, bringing back the financial piece, being in a position of having a good mindset, being able to mold your mindset, you have to have other behaviors, other strategies in place to give yourself the opportunity to be there. You know, I think about the value of something like a morning routine for a community pharmacist who gets up, alarm clock goes off, you start checking your email, the day is crazy, you run into a 12-hour shift, and you walk into chaos and in the moment, maybe a floater left you a bunch of baggage from the night before, the phone starts ringing.

Adam Martin: No.

Tim Ulbrich: That day from the very beginning was set up to not necessarily be successful in terms of mindset. So what I like about — and for me, it’s been things like morning routines that include journaling and meditation and prayer and gratitude reflections. And you give some great examples here in the book as well. But I think this is a great area for folks to think about what works for them but starting your day with intentionality, No. 1, and really leaning on others and seeing what others are doing and seeing what ultimately will work for your plan as well. And you know, many have heard this said over and over again, find those that are doing things successful that you want to role model your behaviors after. Find out what they’re doing. And hint, many of those people are very willing to share what their successes are and to talk about it. And so I think really finding people that you look at and say, wow, they’ve really got a different attitude about the day, they’ve got a different mindset. Well, why is that? You know? Ask them some questions, learn about their behaviors and habits. And I think you do a really nice job in Chapter 2 talking about some ways that folks can do that.

Adam Martin: Thank you. But yeah, to your point, that’s absolutely spot-on. You’ve got to have those morning rituals. And it’s super important. But looking at — because what you said happens at the time of getting into work and there’s all these problems. And that’s a slippery slope with the mindset of looking at problems saying, oh, it’s going to be one of those days or, oh, this always happens to me. If you say things like that and believe things like that and say like, oh, I don’t have hours, I don’t have the time, blah, blah, blah, that’s what you’re going to look for. That’s what this concept plays out to be. But instead, if you ask the question of how is this happening for me and if you just change that just a little change in your mindset but specifically the questions you ask will determine the quality of your life. So I just want to harp that point because it’s huge at breaking that slippery slope of negativity.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, absolutely. I love that. And I’m going to jump ahead here a little bit in the book. My goal here is not that we would cover the book in its entirety.

Adam Martin: Oh yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: I want folks to pick it up and read it and take action themselves. But in Chapter 9, you talk about Nurture Your Networking. And as soon as I saw you make a connection between network and net worth, I said, “I’ve got to” — I mean, it’s a financial show. Got to ask him about them. It’s something we’ve talked about before, the power of networking. We had David Burkus on the show to talk about his book, “Friend of a Friend.” So talk to me about networking, the importance, the value and ultimately, you know, why a pharmacy student should be really strategically thinking about this and how they may feel like hey, I’m in a vulnerable position, I don’t really have much to contribute or share, you know, some practical strategies for how they can implement this.

Adam Martin: Excellent question. So the profession of pharmacy hinges on one concept: It’s all about relationships. And that is so true. And that applies to all areas of life, whatever profession, whatever niche you’re in. It’s all about relationships. And how many of you have heard pharmacy’s a small world? So that’s the truth. And you can either ignore it or ask how can I be resourceful with this fact, coming back to that question that you ask yourself. So a lot of times, to your question of how can people get started if they’re a pharmacy student or if they have this thinking of, oh, I haven’t started yet. And they get in that trap of comparison like, oh, well I don’t have a podcast or I don’t have a book or I don’t have Your Financial Pharmacist success, like who am I to say this and that? Don’t fall into that imposter syndrome.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Adam Martin: Every single person would be so grateful to learn from your experience. And in another chapter, I talk about the three levels of mentorship. And that is the concept that a lot of us think of as, oh, just get someone that has more degrees than the thermometer and learn everything that they know. And that’s mentorship. That’s one of three parts. The other part is having someone on your level that is looking to make progress. But the other part that so many people miss is the best way to learn is to teach. And while you might think that you’re not “there yet,” or you haven’t “made it,” whatever that means, you have people in your influence, in your school, in your company, that would love to learn your points that you’ve gone through, that are starting where you started a year or two ago. So the third part of mentorship is teaching someone who is starting where you started. While you might not think you have value, everyone has a story, everyone has experiences, and everybody wants a mentor. So by teaching that, it creates what I call the win-win-win framework. You can stock that so that you win, they win, and the people you serve win because both of you are rising together.

Tim Ulbrich: Love that. Great advice. So again, we’ve just hit on a couple high points here. I would encourage our listeners, check out a copy of the book, FitPharmacist.com/book. And as Adam mentioned, Part 1 is Your Prescription to Dominate Pharmacy School, ranging topics from why to mindset, self-care, time management, networking, mentorship, just so much wisdom here. And again, a resource I certainly wish I would have had in pharmacy school. And then Part 2, Script Your Career, experts speak, over 20 different experts sharing their career journey, stories and what’s allowed them to be successful in their own regards. And I think, Adam, before I wrap up with a couple questions here, I want to come full circle. You know, you alluded to this concept of making it, whatever that means. And I think bringing this all the way back to the beginning, this is why I loved that you started Chapter 1 with the why because all of this really goes back to this concept of what is the goal? You know, I think so many pharmacy students have this image of success in their mind or residents, they’re chasing something. But they haven’t stopped to think about what are they chasing? Why are they chasing? And do they really want to be chasing that?

Adam Martin: Absolutely.

Tim Ulbrich: And you know, this is where you see people I think often that may be 5, 7, 10 years out and maybe they finally got to whatever they had aspired to be, but they look up and say, “I’m burned out, I’m miserable. This isn’t what I thought I would be.” And I think it goes back to all the way to the beginning, taking time to stop and reflect and say, “Why? Why? What was the purpose to begin with?” And then you start to mold the plan around the why. So we often have people that approach us and say, “You know, I’ve got a really cool idea. I’d like to write a book. But my gosh, I have no idea where to start.” You mentioned four years. We might have scared them based on that statement. But talk to us about process. Like what was this like for you in terms of the daily, the weekly, the monthly rhythms to ultimately have something that you’re holding in hand and you’re distributing it? What was the process that you were able to implement to write the book?

Adam Martin: Yeah, so that comes to what we started this podcast talking about is you don’t want to be perfect the first time. You want to leverage your struggle to create your strength. And that’s really how my whole personal brand began, and that’s a whole other podcast that I think we did, actually. But the thing is is for me, one of my weaknesses is I get great ideas. And if I don’t write them down right away, they’re gone. And I don’t know if you ever resonate with this, but you’ll have a great idea and then like you get distracted and then you think, oh, what was that awesome idea? And you like think and think and think and it never comes back. So I learned quickly to avoid that pain of what was that golden nugget to writing things down. So I would just get ideas, whether it was driving to work or at home or whatever. Most of my ideas come from walking or in the shower. Real talk.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep. I’m with you there.

Adam Martin: So I would just write those down. And that’s literally how I started. I got these ideas and as I kept writing them down, I started to see the structure. I started to see how those aligned in a bigger picture. I would have — so I’m very active on Instagram @thefitpharmacist is the best place to reach me — but I would have people ask me questions through DM or commenting on my posts about struggles, about things they’ve been dealing with. And I kept seeing repeat questions. I was like, wow, there’s a need here. This needs to be addressed. So collectively, just taking notes and engaging with people and just being of service to others, that’s where this content, that’s where this concept came from. So a lot of people think, oh, you’ve got to sit down and crank it out and write 12 hours a day. No, guys. Like this book started from getting an idea and writing it down.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Adam Martin: Getting an idea and writing it down. Doing it over and over again and just looking at how can this be of value? And that’s how you start. It’s always a draft when you start. So why not start with one word?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and this reminds me of one of my favorite books, “The Compound Effect” by Darren Hardy, you know, which relates to finances but any goal, any project you’re working on, is small steps eventually over time result in big things. And I think that’s so true with writing, you know, you’ll see often people will do writing challenges, a few hundred words here or there. But it’s really true. It’s the habit, it’s the practice, and you surprise yourself. You look back and say, “Wow. I didn’t realize I could do this.” Then you start to shape it, you form it, it becomes a chapter. You beat it up, you get to Version 2, Version 3, and so on. But so much less intimidating than starting out and saying OK, I’m going to write a book from scratch. And I always encourage people, if there’s a topic you’re really passionate about, you know, start writing it down and posting things on LinkedIn and doing some other things. Then after 10 or 15 or 20 of those, you’ve got the beginnings of what could be a chapter or a section of a book or certainly could be a podcast or some other medium. Something I also want to point out to our listeners that are thinking about OK, so yes, Adam, you’ve written a book, but you’ve also built a brand. And sometimes I hate that word because I think it’s like we envision Adam as just like scheming in his house how to brand and market things. But the point I want to make here is that as I followed your journey for several years, you started in one place, which is a place I’m passionate about. You provided a value and service to others based on a pain point and a problem that needed to be solved and was one that you were passionate about. You didn’t start by thinking about how you were going to scheme a brand. You started by providing value, providing value, providing value, consistently, regularly, and from that, you’ve learned from the community what they’ve like, what they’ve resonated, what they’re passionate about, where you can provide a service. And so as you’re working then on a book, something like that, you’ve got a group that’s been following you and following your work because you have served them. And I think in my opinion, great businesses are formed off of serving individuals. And I’ve truly believed when you do that well, often the business will follow closely behind.

Adam Martin: 100%. And that comes back to your question about what’s the value of networking, and it’s what you just said. It’s all about relationships. So again, I like providing value in everything I say whether it’s a podcast or talking, so challenge to you, the listener. If you’re thinking about writing a book, if you’re thinking about doing any sort of endeavor whether starting or diving deeper, ask yourself two questions: What are you passionate about? And how can this help other people? Just like someone who thought, I’m passionate about investing and creating financial freedom, I see that there’s a problem with students coming out of pharmacy school at an average of $120,000 in debt, there is a need. I can help them based on my passion. Who am I describing, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: Sounds familiar. Vaguely.

Adam Martin: Yeah, you. Exactly. And because of that, because you focused on that, you have built a brand that is so strong because it’s not based on scheming or how can I get a quick buck? It’s on how can I create relationships with people that have a need that I can solve based on my passion. And that concept, that’s your avenue. Mine’s the same with mindset and health. And I realize that our niches, you know, cross ways in a lot of different paths. And in speaking with you through the years, that’s what’s been so exciting with what’s coming up in the future because yes, self-care, self-development is great health and fitness-wise and creating that freedom, but then there’s also the financial piece. That’s the piece that together, creates the whole picture of the pharmacy student, of the pharmacist, to really be the best version of themselves so that they can dispense their full potential to those that they work with and serve.

Tim Ulbrich: And speaking of those paths crossing over, you and I have been scheming for a long time to figure out, man, how can we work together on a speaking engagement, something we both love doing, we’re passionate about inspiring others. And we’re excited to announce it’s finally going to happen this spring. Saturday, April 30, the Ohio Pharmacists Association annual meeting in Columbus, Ohio, really excited. Great meeting that OPA puts on each and every year. They get a great draw of students and new practitioners and pharmacists and we’re excited to bring this topic. So for those that are attending the Ohio Pharmacists Association meeting or maybe perhaps we can inspire them to do that after hearing this, what can those attending expect to hear from our session? What can they take away?

Adam Martin: Absolutely. So real, practical tips on how to manage stress, fit in fitness and create financial freedom for your life. Those things are crushing our profession. They are stopping people from living their dream and leading to burnout, which is a huge epidemic. And by the way, not just here in the States, but I saw it in Ireland too. And that’s why there was a whole conference on self-care because there’s a need, because there’s advice out there. And I’m sure a lot of you resonate with this. It doesn’t seem practical, it’s not specific to our profession and/or taught by people that are actually in the trenches, facing these problems themselves. That’s why I’m really excited for this because I speak the truth, like I’ll talk and I’ll be like, “Hey, I just dealt with this issue yesterday working my 13-hour shift.” Tim, you got out of school with — like your transformation financially is tremendous and you write about that in “Seven Figure Pharmacist.” And that’s the real talk is we face these things ourselves. And we’re able to speak about them with such conviction and passion because we’ve overcome them and we want to help you do it too.

Tim Ulbrich: It’s going to be a lot of fun. Saturday, April 4. I said the 3rd. It’s actually Saturday, April 4. We’re on for 8:15 a.m. And I can tell you, I don’t think the coffee’s going to be needed when Dr. Adam Martin is in the room. So we’re going to bring a lot of energy. We’d love to see you there. You can register for the OPA annual meeting, learn more about the scheduled events, including this session, by visiting OhioPharmacists.org. So Adam, in addition to picking up a copy of the book, FitPharmacist.com/book, best way for our listeners to reach out to you and learn more about the work that you’re doing over the Fit Pharmacist?

Adam Martin: So the ‘gram is jam. So hit up Instagram, @thefitpharmacist, also on the Facebook page where I create many memes because laughter is the best medicine. So you can get all of your funny memes and gifs and everything else in between on The Fit Pharmacist. That’s Facebook, @FitPharmFam.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Always a pleasure, always inspired by the work that you’re doing. Excited for more collaborations in the future and to see what lies ahead and certainly greatly appreciate you taking the time to do this interview and to share your work with the YFP community.

Adam Martin: Hey, Tim, it’s an honor to be on here. Thank you so much for having me. I believe 100% in what you’re doing. And that’s why I’m super excited for this collab.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And to the YFP community, as always, we appreciate you joining us. And if you like what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your shows each and every week. Again, thank you for joining us, and have a great rest of your week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]